| Ch.1 p.1 para.1 sent.1 | I ke kamaʻilio ʻana i kēia kaʻao, ua ʻōlelo ʻia ma Lāʻie, Koʻolau kona wahi i hānau ai, a he mau māhoe lāua: ʻo Kahauokapaka ka makua kāne, ʻo Mālaekahana ka makuahine. | This tale was told at Laie, Koolau; here they were born, and they were twins; Kahauokapaka was the father, Malaekahana the mother. |
| Ch.1 p.1 para.1 sent.3 | Aia iā ia ka mana nui ma luna o kēlā mau ʻokana. | and he had great authority over these districts. |
| Ch.1 p.1 para.2 sent.1 | I ka manawa i lawe ai ʻo Kahauokapaka iā Mālaekahana i wahine male nāna (hoʻāo), ma hope iho o ko lāua hoʻāo ʻana, haʻi mua ʻo Kahauokapaka i kāna ʻōlelo paʻa i mua o kāna wahine, ʻo lāua wale nō ma ke kaʻawale, ʻoiai i loko o ko lāua mau minuke ʻoluʻolu, a eia ua ʻōlelo paʻa lā, “E kuʻu wahine, he nani ia ua male aʻe nei kāua, a no laila, ke haʻi nei au i kuʻu ʻōlelo paʻa iā ʻoe. | At the time when Kahauokapaka took Malaekahana to wife, after their union, during those moments of bliss when they had just parted from the first embrace, Kahauokapaka declared his vow to his wife, and this was the vow: My wife, since we are married, therefore I will tell you my vow: |
| Ch.1 p.2 para.1 sent.1 | Ma ia hope iho, hāpai hou ʻo Mālaekahana a hānau hou maila he kaikamahine. | After a time Malaekahana conceived again and bore a second
daughter, |
| Ch.1 p.2 para.2 sent.1 | Ma hope mai, ua hāpai wale nō ʻo Mālaekahana he mau kaikamāhine wale nō. | Afterwards Malaekahana bore more daughters, |
| Ch.1 p.2 para.5 sent.2 | Iā ia nei e nahunahu ana, hele akula kēia i mua o ke kahuna me ka ʻōlelo aku, “I hele mai nei au ma ke kauoha a ke kahuna, no ka mea, ke hoʻomaka mai nei ka nahunahu hānau keiki ʻana. | When the pains of childbirth were upon her, she came to the priest and said, "I come at the command of the priest, for the pains of childbirth are upon me; |
| Ch.1 p.2 para.6 sent.2 | Ma ka mea aʻu e noi aku ai, e hāʻawi mai ʻoe. | anything I ask of you, you must give it." |
| Ch.1 p.2 para.6 sent.3 | ”I ia manawa, nonoi akula ke kahuna iā Mālaekahana e hāʻawi mai i kekahi lima i mua o ke alo o ke kahuna e like nō me ka hailona mau o kēia lāhui, ma ka lima nō naʻe āna e makemake ai e hāʻawi aku i mua o ke kahuna. | The the priest asked Malaekahana to give him one of her hands, according to the sign used by this people, whichever hand she wished to give to the priest. |
| Ch.1 p.3 para.2 sent.3 | ʻO ka iʻa ponoʻī nō e loaʻa ana ma kona lima, ʻo ia kāu iʻa e ʻono ai, no ka mea, he kanaka puni kaʻalau ʻōhua hoʻi ko kāne i lilo ai kēlā i ka lawaiʻa, ʻike ʻole ia i kou hānau ʻana. | get the fish you desire with his own hand, for your husband is very fond of the young manini afloat in the membrane, and while he is out fishing he will not know about the birth; |
| Ch.1 p.3 para.5 sent.1 | A lilo nā kaikamāhine ma ka lima o Waka a me Kapūkaʻihaoa ma ke kaʻawale, hoʻi maila ʻo Kahauokapaka mai ka lawaiʻa mai, nīnau ihola i ka wahine, “Pehea ʻoe?” | After the girls had been carried away in the arms of Waka and Kapukaihaoa, Kahauokapaka came back from the fishing, and asked his wife, "How are you?" |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.1 sent.1 | Iā Waka me Kapūkaʻihaoa ma ke kaʻawale me nā hānai a lāua, ʻōlelo akula ʻo Waka iā Kapūkaʻihaoa, “Pehea lā auaneʻi e nalo ai nā hānai a kāua iā Kahauokapaka?” | When Waka and Kapukaihaoa had taken their foster children away, Waka said to Kapukaihaoa, "How shall we hide our foster children from Kahauokapaka?" |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.1 sent.2 | Aia ma laila kekahi ana i ʻike ʻole ʻia e nā mea a pau, a naʻu nō hoʻi e ʻimi koʻu wahi e mālama ai i kaʻu hānai. | a cave is there which no one knows about, and it will be my business to seek a place of protection for my foster child." |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.1 sent.3 | ”lawe akula ʻo Waka iā Lāʻieikawai ma kahi a Kapūkaʻihaoa i kuhikuhi ai, a ma laila ʻo ia i mālama malū ʻia ai ʻo Lāʻieikawai a hiki i kona manawa i hoʻomāhuahua iki aʻe ai. | Waka took Laieikawai where Kapukaihaoa had directed, and there she kept Laieikawai hidden until she was come to maturity. |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.1 sent.4 | Ma hope iho o kēia mau lā, lawe aʻela ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa iā Lāʻielohelohe i uka o Wahiawā ma kahi i ʻōlelo ʻia ʻo Kūkaniloko. | Now, Kapukaihaoa took Laielohelohe to the uplands of Wahiawa, to the place called Kukaniloko. |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.2 sent.1 | I loko o ko Lāʻieikawai mau lā ma Waiʻāpuka, ua hoʻomau ʻia ka piʻo ʻana o ke ānuenue ma kēlā wahi i loko o ka manawa ua a me ka mālie, ʻo ka pō a me ke ao. | All the days that Laieikawai was at Waiapuka a rainbow arch was there constantly, in rain or calm, |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.2 sent.2 | Akā, ʻaʻole naʻe i hoʻomaopopo nā mea a pau i ke ʻano o kēia ānuenue, akā, ua hoʻomau ʻia kēia mau hailona aliʻi ma nā wahi i mālama ʻia ai ua mau māhoe nei. | yet no one understood the nature of this rainbow, but such signs as attend a chief were always present wherever the twins were guarded. |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.3 sent.1 | I kekahi manawa, iā Hulumāniani e kaʻahele ana iā Kauaʻi a puni ma kona ʻano makāula nui no Kauaʻi, a iā ia i hiki ai i luna pono o Kalalea, ʻike maila ʻo ia i ka piʻo a kēia ānuenue i Oʻahu nei. | Just at this time Hulumaniani was making a tour of Kauai in
his character as the great seer of Kauai, and when he reached the summit of Kalalea he beheld the rainbow arching over Oahu; |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.3 sent.2 | Noho ihola ʻo ia ma laila he iwakālua lā i kumu e ʻike maopopo ʻia ai ʻo ke ʻano o kāna mea e ʻike nei. | there he remained 20 days in order to be sure of the nature of the sign which he saw. |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.5 sent.1 | I ua makāula nei ma laila, lohe kēia, ʻo Poloʻula ka mea waʻa o Wailua, no ka mea, he aliʻi ia no ia wahi. | While the seer was there he heard that Poloula owned a canoe at Wailua, for he was chief of that place, |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.6 sent.2 | I ia pō iho, i ka hiki ʻana o ka Hōkūhoʻokelewaʻa, haʻalele lākou iā Kauaʻi, he ʻumikumamālima ko lākou nui, hiki mua maila lākou ma Kamaile i Waiʻanae. | That night when the canoe star rose they left Kauai, 15 strong, and came first to Kamaile in Waianae. |
| Ch.1 p.5 para.6 sent.3 | Ma mua aʻe naʻe o ko ka makāula holo ʻana mai, ua hoʻomākaukau mua ʻo ia hoʻokahi puaʻa hiwa, he moa lawa a me ka iʻa ʻula. | Before the seer sailed, he first got ready a black pig, a white fowl, and a red fish. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.1 sent.1 | I ia lā o lākou i hiki ai ma Waiʻanae, kauoha ka makāula i nā kānaka e noho ma laila a hoʻi mai ʻo ia mai ka huakaʻi kaʻapuni ʻana. | On the day when they reached Waianae the seer ordered the
rowers to wait there until he returned from making the circuit of the island. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.1 sent.3 | ʻIke akula kēia i ke ānuenue e piʻo ana ma Koʻolau Loa e like me kāna ʻike ʻana i kona mau lā i luna o Kalalea. | and saw the rainbow arching at Koolauloa, as he saw it when he was on Kalalea. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.1 sent.2 | I kēlā manawa naʻe a ka makāula i hiki ai i laila, ua nalo mua aku ʻo Waka ma kahi i hūnā ʻia ai ʻo Lāʻieikawai. | Now, just as the seer arrived, Waka had vanished into that place where Laieikawai was concealed. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.3 sent.1 | A pau ko Waka manawa ma kahi o Lāʻieikawai, hoʻi maila ʻo ia, akā, ʻike aʻela kēia ma loko o ka wai i kēia mea e noho ana ma luna iho, emi hope hou akula ʻo Waka, no ka mea, ua manaʻo ʻo ia ʻo Kahauokapaka kēia mea ma kaʻe o ka luawai. | After Waka had been with Laieikawai she returned, but while yet in the water she saw someone sitting above on the bank, so she retreated, for she thought it was Kahauokapaka, this person on the brink of the water hole. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.3 sent.2 | Hoʻi hou akula ʻo Waka me kāna moʻopuna a hiki i ka mōlehulehu ʻana, hoʻomakākiu hou maila ʻo ia me ka manaʻo ua hele aku kēlā mea āna i ʻike ai, akā, aia nō ua makāula nei ma kāna wahi i noho mua ai, no laila, hoʻi hope hou ʻo Waka. | Waka returned to her foster child, and came back at twilight and spied to discover where the person had gone whom she saw, but there was the seer sitting in the same place as before. So Waka went back again. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.4 sent.1 | Ua noho ua makāula nei ma ke kaʻe o kēlā luawai a moe ʻo ia ma laila a ao ia pō. | The seer remained at the edge of the pool, and slept there until morning. |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.4 sent.3 | Haʻalele kēia i ia wahi, kaʻapuni kēia iā Oʻahu nei, ma Koʻolau Poko kona hele mua ʻana a ma Kona nei, a mai ʻaneʻi aku, hiki ma ʻEwa. | forsook this place, journeyed about Oahu, first through Koolaupoko; from there to Ewa |
| Ch.1 p.6 para.4 sent.5 | Piʻi loa akula ʻo ia a hiki i Kamaoha, a ma laila ʻo ia i moe ai a ao ia pō; ʻaʻole ʻo ia i ʻike i kāna mea i ukali mai ai. | ascended Kamaoha, and there slept over night; but did not see the sign he sought. |
| Ch.2 p.7 para.1 sent.1 | A nele ka makāula i ka ʻike i kāna mea e ukali nei, haʻalele kēia iā Kamaoha, hiki kēia i luna pono o Kaʻala, a ma laila ʻo ia i ʻike ai, e piʻo ana ke ānuenue i Molokaʻi. | When the seer failed to see the sign which he was following he left Kamaoha, climbed clear to the top of Kaala, and there saw the rainbow arching over Molokai. |
| Ch.2 p.7 para.2 sent.2 | ʻEkolu mau lā o ia nei ma Kuamoʻokāne, ua hoʻomau ʻia ka uhi paʻapū a ka ua a me ka noe. | Three days he remained on Kuamooakane, thickly veiled in rain and fog. |
| Ch.2 p.7 para.3 sent.1 | I ka ʻehā o nā lā o ia nei ma laila, loaʻa iā ia he waʻa e holo ana i Molokaʻi. | On the fourth day he secured a boat to go to Molokai. |
| Ch.2 p.7 para.3 sent.2 | Kau akula ʻo ia ma luna o ka waʻa a holo akula a like a like o ka moana, loaʻa ka manaʻo ʻino i nā mea waʻa, no ka mea, ua uluhua lāua i ua makāula nei no ka hiamoe a me ka ʻalalā mau ʻana o kahi puaʻa a ʻoʻoʻō mau nō hoʻi o kahi moa. | He went on board the canoe and had sailed half the distance, when the paddlers grew vexed because the prophet did nothing but sleep, while the pig squealed and the cock crowed. |
| Ch.2 p.7 para.4 sent.1 | A no kēia mea, kūnou akula ka mea ma hope o ka waʻa i ke kanaka i luna o kua ʻiako e hoʻi hou ka waʻa i hope a hoʻonoho hou i ka makāula i Oʻahu nei, a ua like ka manaʻo o nā mea waʻa ma ia mea e hoʻihoʻi hope ka waʻa; e moe ana naʻe ka makāula i ia manawa. | So the paddler in front signed to the one at the rear to turn the canoe around and take the seer back as he slept. |
| Ch.2 p.7 para.5 sent.2 | I ia manawa a ka waʻa e hoʻi hope nei, hoʻohuoi ihola ka makāula i ka pā ʻana a ka makani ma kona pāpālina, no ka mea, ua maopopo iā ia kahi a ka makani i pā ai i ka holo ʻana mai Oʻahu aku nei; manaʻo ihola ʻo ia ma kai mai ka makani e pā nei. | When the canoe turned back, the seer distrusted this, because the wind blew in his face; for he knew the direction of the wind when he left Oahu, and now, thought he. the wind is blowing from the seaward. |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.1 sent.2 | I ia manawa, nalu ihola ka makāula i ke kumu o kēia hoʻi hou ʻana o ka waʻa, akā hoʻi, no ko ia nei makemake e ʻike maopopo i ka hana a nā mea waʻa, pule akula ʻo ia i kona akua iā Kūikaʻueke e hoʻoili mai i ka ʻino nui ma luna o ka moana. | Then the seer asked himself the reason. But just to see for himself what the canoe men were doing, he prayed to his god, to Kuikauweke, to bring a great tempest over the ocean. |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.1 sent.3 | Iā ia e pule ana i loko ona iho, hiki koke maila ka ʻino nui ma luna o lākou a pono ʻole ka manaʻo o nā mea waʻa. | As he prayed a great storm came suddenly upon them, and the paddlers were afraid. |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.2 sent.3 | Kainoa paha he pono kāu i kau mai ai ma luna o ko māua waʻa, ʻaʻole kā! | We thought perhaps your coming on board would be a good thing for us. Not so! |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.6 sent.1 | Iā lākou e kamaʻilio ana no kēia mau mea, lele akula ka makāula ma hope o ka waʻa, a lilo ihola iā ia ka hoʻokele. | As he spoke, the seer sprang to the stern of the canoe, took charge of the steering, |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.6 sent.2 | Holo akula lākou a kau ma Haleolono i Molokaʻi. | and they sailed and came to Haleolono, on Molokai. |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.7 sent.1 | Iā lākou i hiki aku ai ma laila, aia hoʻi, e piʻo ana ke ānuenue i Koʻolau e like me kāna ʻike ʻana i kona mau lā ma luna o Kuamoʻokāne. | When they reached there, lo! the rainbow arched over Koolau, as he saw it from Kuamooakane; |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.8 sent.1 | I ia hele ʻana, hiki mua kēia i Waiʻalalā ma luna pono aʻe o Kalaupapa. | He went first clear to the top of Waialala, right above Kalaupapa. |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.8 sent.2 | Iā ia nei ma laila, ʻike maopopo akula ʻo ia, e piʻo ana ke ānuenue i luna o Malelewaʻa ma kahi nihinihi hiki ʻole ke hele ʻia. | Arrived there, he clearly saw the rainbow arching over Malelewaa, over a sharp ridge difficult to reach; |
| Ch.2 p.8 para.8 sent.3 | Aia naʻe ma laila kahi i hūnā ʻia ai ʻo Lāʻieikawai, ʻo ia a me kona kupuna wahine e like me ke kauoha mau a Kapūkaʻihaoa iā Waka ma ka hihiʻo, no ka mea, i ka makāula e holo mai ana ma ka moana, ua ʻike mua ʻē aku ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa i ka makāula a me kāna mau hana, no laila ʻo ia i ʻōlelo mau ai iā Waka ma ka hihiʻo e ʻāhaʻi mua iā Lāʻieikawai ma kahi hiki ʻole ke loaʻa. | there, in truth, was Laieikawai hidden, she and her grandmother, as Kapukaihaoa had commanded Waka in the vision. For as the seer was sailing over the ocean, Kapukaihaoa had fore-knowledge of what the prophet was doing, therefore he told Waka in a vision to carry Laieikawai away where she could not be found. |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.1 sent.1 | I ka makāula i haʻalele ai iā Waiʻalalā, hiki aku kēia ma Waikolu i lalo pono o Malelewaʻa. | After the seer left Waialala he went to Waikolu right below Malelewaa. |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.2 sent.1 | I kēlā lā a ka makāula i hiki ai ma Waikolu, i ia pō iho, hiki mua ke kauoha a Kapūkaʻihaoa iā Lāʻieikawai ma ka moeʻuhane. | On the day when the seer went to Waikolu, the same night, came the command of Kapukaihaoa to Laieikawai in a dream, |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.2 sent.4 | Haʻi maila ka moʻopuna, “Ua hiki mai ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa i oʻu nei ma ka moeʻuhane e ʻōlelo mai ana, e ʻāhaʻi loa ʻoe iaʻu i Hawaiʻi a hoʻonoho ma Paliuli, a ma laila kāua e noho ai. | The grandchild said to her: "Kapukaihaoa has come to me in a dream and said that you should bear me away at once to Hawaii and make our home in Paliuli; |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.3 sent.2 | I ia manawa, ala naʻe lā lāua i ka wanaʻao a hele akula e like me ke kuhikuhi a Kapūkaʻihaoa iā lāua ma ka moeʻuhane. | Then they both arose at dawn and went as they had both been directed by Kapukaihaoa in a vision. |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.4 sent.1 | Haʻalele lāua i ia wahi, hiki aku lāua ma Keawanui, kahi i kapa ʻia ʻo Kalaeloa, a ma laila lāua i hālāwai ai me ke kanaka e hoʻomākaukau ana i ka waʻa e holo ai i Lānaʻi. | They left the place, went to Keawanui, to the place called Kaleloa, and there they met a man who was getting his canoe ready to sail for Lanai. |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.4 sent.2 | Iā lāua i hālāwai aku ai me ka mea waʻa, ʻōlelo akula ʻo Waka, “E ʻae anei ʻoe iā māua e kau pū aku me ʻoe ma ko waʻa a holo aku i kāu wahi i manaʻo ai e holo?” | When they met the canoe man, Waka said: "Will you let us get into the canoe with you, and take us to the place where you intend to go?" |
| Ch.2 p.9 para.5 sent.1 | ʻŌlelo maila ka mea waʻa, “Ke ʻae nei wau e kau pū ʻolua me aʻu ma ka waʻa, akā, hoʻokahi nō hewa, ʻo koʻu kōkoʻolua ʻole e hiki ai ka waʻa.” | Said the canoe man: "I will take you both with me in the canoe; the only trouble is I have no mate to paddle the canoe." |
| Ch.2 p.10 para.5 sent.1 | A no kēia ʻōlelo a ka mea waʻa, ʻī akula ʻo Waka i ke kamaʻāina o lāua nei, “Inā ʻo ke kumu ia o kou hele ʻana i kauoha honua ai ʻoe i nā mea a pau o kou hale iā māua, a laila, ke ʻī aku nei wau he hiki iā māua ke kōkua iā ʻoe ma ka hoe ʻana.” | And at these words, Waka said to their host, "If that is the reason for your going away, leaving us in charge of everything in your house, then let me say, we can help you paddle." |
| Ch.2 p.10 para.6 sent.1 | A ʻike ka mea waʻa he mea kaumaha kēia ʻōlelo a Waka i mua ona, ʻōlelo akula ʻo ia i mua o nā malihini, “ʻAʻole oʻu manaʻo e hoʻounauna aku iā ʻolua e kōkua mai iaʻu ma ka hoe pū ʻana i ka waʻa, no ka mea, he mea nui ʻolua naʻu. | The man was displeased at these words of Waka to him. He said to the strangers, "Let me not think of asking you to paddle the canoe; for I hold you to be persons of importance." |
| Ch.2 p.10 para.7 sent.2 | I ia hele ʻana, ma Kaluaʻaha kona hiki mua ʻana a moe aku ʻo ia i Hālawa. | As he went he came first to Kaluaaha and slept at Halawa, |
| Ch.2 p.10 para.7 sent.3 | A ma kēia hele ʻana a ia nei, ua kūkala aku ʻo ia i ka maikaʻi o Lāʻieikawai e like me kona manaʻo paʻa. | and here and on the way there he proclaimed, as he had vowed, the beauty of Laieikawai. |
| Ch.2 p.11 para.1 sent.1 | A ma kekahi lā aʻe, i ke kakahiaka nui, loaʻa iā ia ka waʻa e holo ana i Kalaupapa. | The next day, in the morning, he found a canoe sailing to Kalaupapa, |
| Ch.2 p.11 para.1 sent.2 | Kau akula ʻo ia ma luna o ka waʻa, hiki mua ʻo ia i Pelekunu a me Wailau, a ma hope, hiki i Waikolu, kahi a ka makāula e noho ana. | got on board and went first to Pelekunu and Wailau; afterwards he came to Waikolu, where the seer was staying. |
| Ch.2 p.11 para.2 sent.2 | Kū akula ʻo ia ma waho o ka ʻaha a kāhea akula me ka leo nui, “E ka hū, e nā makaʻāinana, e ka lōpā kuakea, lōpā hoʻopili wale, e nā aliʻi, nā kāhuna, nā kilo, nā ʻaialo, ua ʻike au i nā mea a pau ma kēia hele ʻana mai nei aʻu. | he stood outside the crowd and cried with a loud voice: "O ye men of the people, husbandmen, laborers, tillers of the soil; O ye chiefs, priests, soothsayers, all men of rank in the household of the chief! All manner of men have I beheld on my way hither; |
| Ch.2 p.11 para.4 sent.1 | A laila haʻi maila kēlā i ke kumu o kona kāhea ʻana a me kona ʻoliʻoli i mua o ke aliʻi, “Ma ke kakahiaka nui o ka lā i nehinei, e lawelawe ana wau i ka waʻa no ka manaʻo e holo i Lānaʻi, hōʻea mai ana kēia wahine me ke kaikamahine. | Then the man told why he shouted and why his face was glad in the presence of the chief: ''In the early morning yesterday, while I was working over the canoe, intending to sail to Lanai, a certain woman came with her daughter, |
| Ch.2 p.12 para.4 sent.2 | Akā, ua hāʻupu honua aʻe ka makāula, me he mea lā, ʻo kāna mea e ukali nei, a no kēia mea, neʻeneʻe loa akula ka makāula a kokoke, paʻa akula ma ka lima o kahi kanaka a huki malū akula iā ia. | So the seer moved slowly toward him, got near, and seized the man by the arm, and drew him quietly after him. |
| Ch.2 p.12 para.4 sent.3 | Iā lāua ma kahi kaʻawale, nīnau pono akula ka makāula i ua wahi kanaka nei, “Ua ʻike nō anei ʻoe i kēlā kaikamahine ma mua āu e kamaʻilio nei i ke aliʻi?” | When they were alone, the seer asked the man directly, "Did you know that girl before about whom you were telling the chief?" |
| Ch.2 p.12 para.5 sent.1 | Hōʻole akula ua wahi kanaka nei ma ka ʻī aku, “ʻAʻole au i ʻike ma mua. | The man denied it and said, "No; I had never seen her before; |
| Ch.3 p.13 para.1 sent.1 | I ia hele ʻana o ka makāula ma hope iho o ko lāua hālāwai ʻana me kahi kanaka, hiki mua kēia i luna o Kawela. | When the seer set out after meeting that man, he went first up Kawela; |
| Ch.3 p.13 para.2 sent.2 | Ua hiki ʻole iā ia ke ʻike aku i ka mea āna i ʻike ai i luna o Kawela, akā, ua moe ka makāula ma laila i ia pō me ka manaʻo i ke kakahiaka e ʻike ai i kāna mea e ʻimi nei. | By this time it was very dark; he could not see the sign he saw from Kawela; but the seer slept there that night, thinking that at daybreak he would see the person he was seeking. |
| Ch.3 p.13 para.3 sent.1 | I kēlā pō a ka makāula e moe ai i Kaʻamola, aia hoʻi, ua hiki ka ʻōlelo kauoha a Kapūkaʻihaoa iā Lāʻieikawai ma ka moeʻuhane e like me ke kuhikuhi iā lāua i loko o ko lāua mau lā ma Malelewaʻa. | That night, while the seer was sleeping at Kaamola, then came
the command of Kapukaihaoa to Laieikawai in a dream, just as he had directed them at Malelewaa. |
| Ch.3 p.13 para.3 sent.2 | I ia wanaʻao ʻana aʻe, loaʻa iā lāua ka waʻa e holo ai i Lānaʻi, a kau lāua ma laila a holo akula, a ma Maunalei ko lāua wahi i noho ai i kekahi mau lā. | At dawn they found a canoe sailing to Lanai, got on board, and went and lived for some time at Maunalei. |
| Ch.3 p.13 para.4 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai mā i haʻalele ai iā Kalaeloa i ia kakahiaka, ala aʻela ka makāula, e kū ana ka pūnohu i ka moana a me ka uakoko, aia naʻe, ua uhi paʻapū ʻia ka moana e ka noe a me ke ʻawa ma waena o Molokaʻi a me Lānaʻi. | After Laieikawai and her companion had left Kalaeloa, at daybreak, the seer arose and saw that clouds and falling rain obscured the sea between Molokai and Lanai with a thick veil of fog and mist. |
| Ch.3 p.13 para.4 sent.2 | ʻEkolu mau lā o ka uhi paʻapū ʻana o kēia noe i ka moana, a i ka ʻehā o ko ka makāula mau lā ma Kaʻamola i ke kakahiaka nui, ʻike akula ʻo ia, e kū ana ka ʻōnohi i luna pono o Maunalei, akā, ua nui loa ka minamina o ka makāula no ka hālāwai ʻole me kāna mea e ʻimi nei. | Three days the veil of mist hid the sea, and on the fourth day of the seer's stay at Kaamola, in the very early morning, he saw an end of the rainbow standing right above Maunalei. Now the seer regretted deeply not finding the person he was seeking; |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.1 sent.1 | Ua ʻaneʻane e hala nā lā he ʻumi iā ia ma Molokaʻi, ʻike hou akula ʻo ia, e kū ana ka pūnohu i luna o Haleakalā. | About 10 days passed at Molokai before he saw the end of the rainbow standing over Haleakala; |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.1 sent.2 | Haʻalele kēia iā Molokaʻi, hiki mua ʻo ia i luna o Haleakalā ma kēlā lua pele, ʻaʻole naʻe ʻo ia i ʻike i kāna mea e ʻimi nei. | he left Molokai, went first to Haleakala, to the fire pit, but did not see the person he was seeking. |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.2 sent.1 | I ua makāula nei naʻe i hiki ai ma laila, ʻike akula ʻo ia iā Hawaiʻi, ua uhi paʻapū ʻia ka ʻāina e ka ʻohu a me ka noe. | When the seer reached there, he looked toward Hawaii; the land was veiled thick in cloud and mist |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.2 sent.2 | A haʻalele kēia i ia wahi, hiki kēia i Kaʻuiki, a ma laila ʻo ia i kūkulu ai i wahi heiau kahi hoʻi e hoʻomana ai i kona akua, ka mea hiki ke kuhikuhi i kāna mea e ʻimi nei. | He left the place, went to Kauwiki, and there built a place of worship to call upon his god as the only one to guide him to the person he was seeking. |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.2 sent.3 | I ua makāula nei e kaʻapuni ana ma nā wahi a pau āna i kipa aku ai, ua kauoha mua aku ka makāula inā e loaʻa kāna mea e ʻimi nei, a laila, e huli aku iā ia ma kahi e loaʻa ai. | Wherever the seer stopped in his journeying he directed the people, if they found the person he was following, to search him out wherever he might be. |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.3 sent.1 | A pau ke kapu heiau a ua makāula nei ma Kaʻuiki i nā pō ʻo Kāne a me Lono paha, a laila, ʻike maopopo ʻia akula ke kālaʻe ʻana o ka ʻāina a puni ʻo Hawaiʻi, a ua waiho pono mai nā kuahiwi. | At the end of the days of consecration of the temple, while the seer was at Kauwiki, near the night of the gods Kane and Lono, the land of Hawaii cleared and he saw to the summit of the mountains. |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.4 sent.1 | Ua nui nō nā lā o ka makāula ma Kaʻuiki, ʻaneʻane makahiki a ʻoi aʻe paha, ʻaʻole naʻe ʻo ia i ʻike iki i ka hōʻailona mau āna e ukali nei. | Many days the seer remained at Kauwiki, nearly a year or more, but he never saw the sign he had followed thither. |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.5 sent.1 | I kekahi lā i ka malama ʻo Kaʻaona i nā Kū i ka manawa kakahiaka nui, ʻike ʻāweʻaweʻa akula ʻo ia he wahi ʻōnohi ma Koʻolau o Hawaiʻi. | One day in June, during the first days of the month, very early in the morning, he caught a glimpse of something like a rainbow at Koolau on Hawaii; |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.7 sent.1 | I ia pō iho, i loko o kona manawa hiamoe, hālāwai maila kona akua me ia ma ka hihiʻo, ʻī maila, “Ua ʻike au i kou luhi a me kou hoʻomanawanui ʻana me ke ake e loaʻa iā ʻoe ka moʻopuna a Waka me kou manaʻo hoʻi e loaʻa kou pōmaikaʻi no kāna moʻopuna mai. | That night, in his sleep, his god came to him in a vision and said; "I have seen the pains and the patience with which you have striven to find Waka's grandchild, thinking to gain honor through her grandchild. |
| Ch.3 p.15 para.7 sent.2 | I loko o kāu pule ʻana, ua hiki iaʻu ke kuhikuhi e loaʻa nō ʻo Lāʻieikawai iā ʻoe ma waena o Puna a me Hilo i loko o ka ulu lāʻau e noho ana i loko o ka hale i uhi ʻia i nā hulu melemele o ka ʻōʻō. | Your prayers have moved me to show you that Laieikawai dwells between Puna and Hilo in the midst of the forest, in a house made of the yellow feathers of the oo bird '"; |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.1 sent.1 | I ia pō a ao aʻe i ke kakahiaka nui, iā ia ma luna o Kaʻuiki, ʻike akula ʻo ia i ke kīlepalepa a ka peʻa o ka waʻa i lalo o Kaihalulu. | And when it was day, in the early morning, as he was on Kauwiki, he saw the flapping of the sail of a canoe down at Kaihalulu. |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.1 sent.2 | Holo wikiwiki akula ʻo ia a hiki i ke awa, nīnau akula i kahi a kēia waʻa e holo ai, haʻi ʻia maila, “E holo ana i Hawaiʻi,” a noi akula ʻo ia e kau pū me lākou ma ka waʻa, a ʻae ʻia maila ʻo ia e holo pū me lākou. | He ran quickly and came to the landing, and asked the man where the boat was going. The man said, "It is going to Hawaii"; thereupon he entreated the man to take him, and the latter consented. |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.2 sent.1 | I ia manawa a ia nei i hiki ai i ka waʻa, haʻi mua akula ʻo ia i kona manaʻo i nā mea waʻa, “E nā mea waʻa, e haʻi mai ʻoukou i kaʻu hana ma kēia holo ʻana o kākou. | When he reached the shore he first made a bargain with them. "You paddlers, tell me what you expect of me on this trip; |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.2 sent.2 | Ma kā ʻoukou mea e ʻōlelo mai ai, ma laila wau e hoʻolohe ai, no ka mea, he kanaka wau i hana pono ʻole ʻia e nā mea waʻa i koʻu holo ʻana mai Oʻahu mai, no laila wau e haʻi mua aku nei iā ʻoukou, e nā mea waʻa, malia o like ʻoukou me lāua.” | whatever you demand, I will accede to; for I was not well treated by the men who brought me here from Oahu, so I will first make a bargain with you men, lest you should be like them." |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.3 sent.1 | A no kēia ʻōlelo a ka makāula, ʻōlelo maila nā mea waʻa ʻaʻole e hana ʻia kekahi mea pono ʻole ma ia holo ʻana o lākou. | The men promised to do nothing amiss on this trip, |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.3 sent.2 | A pau kēia mau mea, kau lākou ma ka waʻa a holo akula. | and the talk ended; he boarded the canoe and set out. |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.4 sent.1 | Ma ia holo ʻana, hiki mua lākou i Māhukona ma Kohala, moe ma laila i ia pō. | On the way they landed first at Mahukona in Kohala, slept there that night, |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.5 sent.1 | Ua nui loa nā lā ona ma laila o ka noho ʻana, ʻaʻole naʻe ʻo ia i ʻike i kāna mea e ʻimi ai, akā, ma kona ʻano makāula, hoʻomau akula ʻo ia i ka pule i ke akua e like me kona mau lā ma Kaʻuiki. | Many days he remained there without seeing the sign he sought; but in his character as seer he continued praying to his god as when he was on Kauwiki, |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.5 sent.2 | A no ka pule hoʻomau a ua makāula nei, ua loaʻa hou iā ia ke kuhikuhi ʻana e like me kēlā hōʻike iā ia ma Kaʻuiki. | and in answer to the seer's prayer, he had again the same sign that was shown to him on Kauwiki. |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.6 sent.2 | Kaʻahele akula ʻo ia iā Hawaiʻi, ma Hāmākua kona hiki mua ʻana. | and traversed Hawaii, starting from Hamakua, |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.7 sent.1 | Iā ia i hiki ai i Hāmākua, ma lalo o Waipiʻo kona wahi i noho ai ma Pākaʻalana; ʻaʻole naʻe he nui kona mau lā ma laila. | Having arrived at Hamakua, he dwelt in the Waipio Valley at the temple of Pakaalana but did not stay there long. |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.7 sent.2 | Haʻalele ka makāula i ia wahi, hiki aku ʻo ia i Laupāhoehoe, a ma laila aku a hiki i Kaiwilahilahi, a ma laila ʻo ia i noho ai he mau makahiki. | The seer left that place, went to Laupahoehoe, and thence to Kaiwilahilahi, and there remained some years. |
| Ch.3 p.17 para.8 sent.1 | (Ma ʻaneʻi, e waiho kākou i ka moʻolelo no ka ʻimi ʻana o ka makāula. | (Here we will leave the story of the seer's search. |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.1 sent.1 | Ma nā helu mua o kēia kaʻao, ua ʻike kākou na Kapūkaʻihaoa i kauoha iā Waka ma ka moeʻuhane e hoʻihoʻi iā Lāʻieikawai i Paliuli ma muli o ka ʻike a ka makāula. | In the first part of the story we saw that Kapukaihaoa commanded Waka in a dream to take Laieikawai to Paliuli, as the seer saw. |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.1 sent.2 | Ua hoʻokō ʻia nō naʻe e like me ke kauoha, ua noho ʻo Lāʻieikawai ma Paliuli a hiki i kona hoʻokanaka makua ʻana. | The command was carried out. Laieikawai dwelt at Paliuli until she was grown to maidenhood. |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.2 sent.1 | Iā Kauakahialiʻi lāua ʻo Kaʻiliokalauokekoa i hoʻi ai i Kauaʻi ma hope iho o ko lāua hālāwai ʻana me ka ʻOlali o Paliuli (Lāʻieikawai), a hiki lākou i Kauaʻi ma uka o Pihanakalani, kuʻi akula ka lono iā Kauaʻi a puni. | When Kauakahialii and Kailiokalauokekoa returned to Kauai after their meeting with the "beauty of Paliuli" |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.2 sent.3 | ʻO ʻAiwohikupua naʻe kekahi o ia poʻe aliʻi i ʻākoakoa pū mai ma kēia ʻaha uē o nā malihini. | Aiwohikupua came with the rest of the chiefs to wail for the strangers. |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.3 sent.3 | Ma Kohala kuʻu hiki mua ʻana. | touched first at Kohala, |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.3 sent.4 | Kaʻahele au ma Kona, Kaʻū, a hiki au i Keaʻau a ma Puna, a ma laila wau i noho ai, a ma laila wau i hālāwai ai me kekahi wahine maikaʻi i ʻoi aku ma mua o ia nei (Kaʻiliokalauokekoa), a ʻo ka ʻoi nō hoʻi i ia manawa o nā wāhine maikaʻi o kēia mau mokupuni a pau.” | went on to Kona, Kau, and came to Keaau, in Puna, and there I tarried, and there I met another woman surpassingly beautiful, more so than this woman here (Kailiokalauokekoa), more than all the beauties of this whole group of islands." |
| Ch.3 p.18 para.4 sent.1 | A laila, haʻi akula ʻo Kauakahialiʻi, “I ka pō mua ma hope iho o ko lāua hālāwai ʻana me kuʻu wahi kahu nei, haʻi maila ʻo ia i kona manawa e hiki mai ai i kahi o ko mākou wahi e noho ana, a haʻi maila nō hoʻi ʻo ia i nā hōʻailona o kona hiki ʻana mai, no ka mea, ua ʻōlelo aku kuʻu wahi kahu nei i kāne au na ua wahine nei me ke koi aku nō hoʻi e iho pū mai lāua me ua wahi kahu nei oʻu, akā, ua haʻi mai kēlā i kāna ʻōlelo, 'E hoʻi ʻoe a ko hānai, kuʻu kāne hoʻi āu e ʻōlelo mai nei, ʻōlelo aku ʻoe iā ia, a kēia pō wau hiki aku. | Then said Kauakahialii: "On the first night that she met my man she told him at what time she would reach the place where we were staying and the signs of her coming, for my man told her I was to be her husband and entreated her to come down with him; but she said: 'Go back to this ward of yours who is to be my husband and tell him this night I will come. |
| Ch.3 p.19 para.2 sent.1 | “A pau kāna ʻōlelo ʻana iā Lāʻieikawai i kēia mau mea, ʻī maila ka wahine i ua wahine kahu nei oʻu, 'E hoʻi ʻoe, a ma kēia pō hiki aku au. | "When he had told Laieikawai all these things the woman said to him, ' You return, and to-night I will come |
| Ch.3 p.19 para.3 sent.7 | I ia kani ʻana nō hoʻi, malu ana ke aka ma ka puka o ka hale, aia hoʻi, ua paʻa ʻo loko i ka noe. | as soon as it sounded there fell the shadow of a figure at the door of the house. Behold! the room was thick with mist, |
| Ch.3 p.19 para.7 sent.1 | A pau ke kamaʻilio ʻana a nā aliʻi no kēia mau mea a me ka walea ʻana e like me ka mea mau o ka puka malihini ʻana, a ma hope koke iho o ia mau lā, lawe aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i kahi o Kauakahialiʻi i kanaka lawelawe i mua o kona alo me ka manaʻo o ʻAiwohikupua, ʻo kēlā wahi kanaka ka mea e loaʻa ai ko ke aliʻi makemake. | The chiefs' reception was ended and the accustomed ceremonies on the arrival of strangers performed. And soon after those days Aiwohikupua took Kauakahialii's man to minister in his presence, thinking that this man would be the means to attain his desire. |
| Ch.3 p.19 para.7 sent.2 | A no kēia kumu, hoʻolilo loa aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i ua wahi kanaka nei i poʻo kiʻekiʻe ma luna o nā mea a pau, ʻo ko ke aliʻi mau ʻāina a pau a me nā kānaka a pau loa, nā aliʻi a me nā makaʻāinana, ma kona ʻano kuhina nui. | Therefore Aiwohikupua exalted this man to be head over all things, over all the chief's land, over all the men, chiefs, and common people, as his chief counsellor. |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.1 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ka lilo ʻana o ua wahi kanaka nei i mea nui i mua o ke aliʻi me he kuhina nui lā, a ʻo ia ka hoa kūkā mau o ke aliʻi ma nā mea e leʻaleʻa ai ke aliʻi me ka manaʻo aku o ka poʻe ʻē, e kūkā ana ma nā mea pili i ka ʻāina a me nā waiwai e like me ka mea mau i ka noho aliʻi ʻana. | After this man had become great before the chief, even his high counsellor, they consulted constantly together about those matters which pleased the chief, while the people thought they discussed the administration of the land and of the substance which pertained to the chief; |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.1 sent.2 | Eia kā, ʻo Lāʻieikawai nō kā lāua kūkā mau a he ʻuʻuku ke kūkā ma nā mea ʻē aʻe. | but it was about Laieikawai that the two talked and very seldom about anything else. |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.2 sent.1 | Ma mua aku naʻe o ko ʻAiwohikupua lohe ʻana iā Kauakahialiʻi no Lāʻieikawai, ua hōʻike ʻē ʻo ia i kāna ʻōlelo paʻa i mua o kona mau kaukaualiʻi a me nā kaikuahine ona a me kona poʻe ʻaialo a pau, a eia kāna ʻōlelo paʻa, “ʻAuhea ʻoukou e koʻu mau kaukaualiʻi a me nā kaikuahine oʻu, koʻu mau ʻaialo a pau. | Even before Aiwohikupua heard from Kauakahialii about Laieikawai he had made a vow before his food companions, his sisters, and before all the men of rank in his household: "Where are you, O chiefs, O my sisters, all my food companions! |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.2 sent.3 | Inā i ʻōlelo ʻia mai he mau wāhine maikaʻi, ʻaʻole nō hoʻi au e hāʻawi i koʻu kino e komo aku ma ke ʻano kolohe, he ʻole loa nō, no ka mea, he kanaka hana pono ʻole ʻia wau e nā wāhine mai koʻu wā ʻōpiopio mai a hiki i koʻu hoʻokanaka makua ʻana. | no matter how beautiful she is reported to be, nor will I get into mischief with a woman, not with anyone at all. For I have been ill-treated by women from my youth up. |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.2 sent.5 | Inā no loko mai o Moaʻulanuiākea kahi o nā wāhine ʻoluʻolu aʻu i lohe ai, a laila, ʻo kaʻu wahine makemake ia, inā i kiʻi ʻia mai wau ma nā ʻano ʻelua.” | even from Moaulanuiakea, a place of kind women, I have heard; so that is the sort of woman I desire to marry." |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.4 sent.1 | I kekahi lā i ke awakea, hiamoe ihola ke aliʻi, loaʻa ihola ʻo Lāʻieikawai iā ʻAiwohikupua ma ka moeʻuhane. | Next day, at midday, the chief slept and Laieikawai came to Aiwohikupua in a dream |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.4 sent.2 | Ua like kāna ʻike ʻana iā Lāʻieikawai ma ka moeʻuhane me kā Kauakahialiʻi ʻōlelo ʻana iā ia. | and he saw her in the dream as Kauakahialii had described her. |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.5 sent.1 | I loko o ia ala ʻana aʻe, aia hoʻi, he mea minamina loa i ke aliʻi i kona ʻike ʻana iā Lāʻieikawai ma ka moeʻuhane, no ka mea, ua ala ʻē mai ka hiamoe o ke aliʻi. | he sorrowed after the vision of Laieikawai, because he had awakened so soon out of sleep; |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.5 sent.2 | A no ia mea, makemake ihola ke aliʻi e loaʻa hou iā ia i ka hiamoe lōʻihi ʻana ma ia awakea i kumu e ʻike hou aku ai i kāna mea i ʻike ai ma ka moeʻuhane. | therefore he wished to prolong his midday nap in order to see again her whom he had beheld in his dream. |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.6 sent.1 | Hoʻāʻo hou ihola ke aliʻi e hiamoe hou, loaʻa hou nō ʻo Lāʻieikawai ma ka hihiʻo pōkole loa. | The chief again slept, and again Laieikawai came to him for a moment, |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.6 sent.8 | ʻO ia ihola ka ʻōlelo paʻa a ke aliʻi, no ka mea, ua makemake loa ke aliʻi e loaʻa iā ia ka hiamoe lōʻihi i kumu e launa hou ai lāua ma ka moeʻuhane me Lāʻieikawai. | The chief took this oath because of his strong desire to sleep longer in order to make Laieikawai's acquaintance in his dream. |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.8 sent.1 | I loko o kēia hana a ke aliʻi, ʻaʻole naʻe ʻo ia i haʻi aku i kēia mea āna e ʻike nei ma ka moeʻuhane. | During all this time he did not tell anyone about what he saw in the dream; |
| Ch.4 p.21 para.9 sent.4 | A laila, hāpai aʻela ia i wahi ʻōlelo ma ke mele penei: | Then he raised his voice in song, as follows: |
| Ch.4 p.23 para.1 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula ke kuhina o ke aliʻi ma hope iho o ka pau ʻana o ke mele ʻana, “He mea kupanaha! ʻAʻole hoʻi āu wahine a kāua e noho nei, akā, i loko o kāu mele e heluhelu nei, me he wahine lā kāu.” | Said the counsellor to the chief, after he had ended his singing, "This is strange! You have had no woman since we two have been living here, yet in your song you chanted as if you had a woman here." |
| Ch.4 p.23 para.3 sent.2 | ʻŌlelo akula ke aliʻi i kona hoa kūkā, “Ma kēia ʻona ʻawa o kāua, ʻaʻole i waiwai iki.” | Said the chief to his counsellor, "No good at all has come from this awa drinking of ours." |
| Ch.4 p.23 para.6 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ia manawa, hoʻomau akula ke aliʻi i ka inu ʻawa a hala nā lā he nui; ua like paha me hoʻokahi makahiki. | After this the chief kept on drinking awa many days, perhaps a year, |
| Ch.4 p.23 para.7 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ko ke aliʻi hoʻopau ʻana no ka inu ʻawa, ʻakahi nō a haʻi aku ke aliʻi i ka loaʻa ʻana o Lāʻieikawai ma ka moeʻuhane a me ke kumu o kona hoʻomau ʻana i ka inu ʻawa, a haʻi pū akula nō hoʻi ke aliʻi i ke kumu o kona kau ʻana i kānāwai paʻa, no ka mea, walaʻau i loko o kona wā hiamoe. | It was only after he quit awa drinking that he told anyone how Laieikawai had come to him in the dream and why he had drunk the awa and also why he had laid the command upon them not to talk while he slept. |
| Ch.4 p.23 para.10 sent.1 | Ma mua o ka napoʻo ʻana o ka lā, kauoha ʻia ka poʻe nānā uli o ke aliʻi a me nā kilokilo e nānā i nā ʻōuli o ke ao a me ka moana inā he hiki i ke aliʻi ke hele, a inā he hiki ʻole e like me ka mea mau. | Before the going down of the sun the steersmen and soothsayers were ordered to observe the look of the clouds and the ocean to see whether the chief could go or not on his journey, according to the signs. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.1 sent.1 | A i ka wanaʻao, i ka puka ʻana o ka Hōkūhoʻokelewaʻa, kau akula ke aliʻi a me kona kuhina, nā hoe waʻa he ʻumikumamāono, nā hoʻokele ʻelua, he iwakālua ko lākou nui ma luna o nā kaulua, a holo akula. | And in the early morning at the rising of the canoe-steering star the chief went on board with his counsellor and his sixteen paddlers and two steersmen, twenty of them altogether in the double canoe, and set sail. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.1 sent.2 | I ia holo ʻana a lākou ma kēia holo ʻana, hiki mua lākou ma Nānākuli i Waiʻanae. | As they sailed, they came first to Nanakuli at Waianae. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.1 sent.3 | I ia wanaʻao, haʻalele lākou i ia wahi, hiki mua lākou i Mōkapu, a ma laila lākou i noho ai he ʻumi lā, no ka mea, ua loʻohia lākou i ka ʻino; hiki ʻole ke holo i Molokaʻi. | In the early morning they left this place and went first to Mokapu and stayed there ten days, for they were delayed by a storm and could not go to Molokai. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.1 sent.5 | I ia pō iho a ao, hiki lākou i Polihua ma Lānaʻi, a ma laila aku, hiki ma Ukumehame. | That night and the next day they sailed to Polihua, on Lanai, and from there to Ukumehame, |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.1 sent.6 | A no ka makani ʻino i ia lā, ua noho lākou ma laila a i kekahi lā aʻe, haʻalele lākou i ia wahi, hiki lākou i Kīpahulu i ia lā. | and as the wind was unfavorable, remained there, and the next day left that place and went to Kipahulu. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.2 sent.1 | Iā lākou ma Kīpahulu, hoʻoholo aʻela ke aliʻi i ʻōlelo e hele wāwae ma uka a ma nā waʻa nā kānaka. | At Kipahulu the chief said he would go along the coast afoot and the men by boat. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.2 sent.2 | Ma kahi naʻe a lākou i noho ai, ua nui ka poʻe mahalo no ʻAiwohikupua no ke kanaka maikaʻi. | Now wherever they went the people applauded the beauty of Aiwohikupua. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.3 sent.1 | Haʻalele lākou iā Kīpahulu, hiki lākou ma Hāna. | They left Kipahulu and went to Hana, |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.3 sent.2 | Ma uka nō ke aliʻi me kona kuhina, ma nā waʻa nō nā kānaka. | the chief and his counsellor by land, the men by canoe. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.3 sent.4 | Iā lākou i hiki aku ai ma ke awa pae waʻa o Haneoʻo i Hāna, he nui ka poʻe i lulumi mai e mākaʻikaʻi i ke aliʻi no ka pākela o ka maikaʻi. | When they reached the canoe landing at Haneoo at Hana the people crowded to behold the chief, because of his exceeding beauty. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.4 sent.2 | I loko hoʻi o ko lāua ʻike ʻana i ua kaikamahine aliʻi nei o Hāna, a laila, ua hoʻopuni ʻia ke aliʻi kāne a me kona kuhina e nā kuko, a ʻo ia nō hoʻi ke kumu o ko ʻAiwohikupua mā noho ʻana ma laila i ia lā. | When they saw the princess of Hana, the chief and his counsellor conceived a passion for her; that was the reason why Aiwohikupua stayed there that day. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.5 sent.1 | A pau ka heʻe nalu ʻana a nā kamaʻāina, a i ka nalu pau loa o ko Hinaikamalama heʻe ʻana, ʻo ka nalu ia i pae, hoʻopololei maila ka heʻe ʻana a ke kaikamahine aliʻi ma ka wai o Kūmaka, kahi hoʻi a ʻAiwohikupua mā e noho mai ana. | When the people of the place had ended surfing and Hinaikamalama rode her last breaker, as she came in. the princess pointed her board straight at the stream of Kumaka where Aiwohikupua and his companion had stopped. |
| Ch.4 p.24 para.5 sent.2 | I ke kaikamahine aliʻi naʻe e ʻauʻau ana i ka wai o Kūmaka, ua hoʻopūʻiwa ʻia ke aliʻi kāne a me kona kuhina e ke kuko ʻino, a no ia mea, ʻiniki malū akula ke kuhina o ke aliʻi iā ʻAiwohikupua e hoʻokaʻawale iā lāua mai kahi a Hinaikamalama e ʻauʻau ana i ʻole lāua e pilikia ma ka manaʻo. | While the princess was bathing in the water of Kumaka the chief and his counsellor desired her, so the chief's counsellor pinched Aiwohikupua quietly to withdraw from the place where Hinaikamalama was bathing, but their state of mind got them into trouble. |
| Ch.4 p.25 para.5 sent.1 | A pau ka ʻauʻau ʻana a lāua, hoʻi akula lāua me ka manaʻo e kau ma luna o nā waʻa a holo aku, akā, ʻike akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i ke aliʻi wahine e kōnane mai ana a manaʻo ihola ke aliʻi kāne malihini e hele i ke kōnane, akā, ua lilo mua na ke aliʻi wahine ke kāhea e kōnane lāua. | After the bath, they returned to the canoe thinking to go aboard and set out, but Aiwohikupua saw the princess playing konane and the stranger chief thought he would play a game with her; now, the princess had first called them to come and play. |
| Ch.4 p.25 para.5 sent.2 | A hiki ʻo ʻAiwohikupua ma kahi o ke aliʻi wahine, kau nā ʻiliʻili a paʻa ka papa, nīnau mai ke aliʻi wahine, “He aha ke kumu pili o ka malihini ke make i ke kamaʻāina?” | So Aiwohikupua joined the princess; they placed the pebbles on the board, and the princess asked, "What will the stranger stake if the game is lost to the woman of Hana? " |
| Ch.4 p.25 para.7 sent.4 | Ma kāu hana e ʻōlelo mai ai, ma laila wau e hoʻolohe ai a e hoʻokō ai hoʻi, ma ka mea kūpono naʻe o ka hoʻokō aku. | and will do whatever you tell me just as we have agreed, |
| Ch.4 p.25 para.7 sent.11 | A no kēia mau ʻōlelo maikaʻi a ke aliʻi wahine i mua o ʻAiwohikupua, a laila, hoʻoholo koke aʻela ʻo ia i kona manaʻo ʻae ma ka waha wale nō. | To this jesting offer of the princess, Aiwohikupua readily gave
his word of assent. |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.1 sent.9 | A pau nā kauoha a ʻAiwohikupua iā Hinaikamalama, haʻalele lākou iā Maui, hiki lākou nei i Kapakai ma Kohala. | After laying his commands upon Hinaikamalama, they left Maui and went to Kapakai at Kohala. |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.2 sent.1 | I kekahi lā aʻe, haʻalele lākou iā Kapakai, holo akula lākou a ma waho pono o Kauhola, nānā akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i ka ʻākoakoa lehulehu ʻana o nā kānaka ma uka o Kapaʻau. | The next day they left Kapakai and sailed along by Kauhola, and Aiwohikupua saw a crowd of men gathering mountainward of Kapaau. |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.3 sent.1 | A hiki lākou i ke awa pae waʻa ma Kauhola, nīnau akula ke aliʻi i ke kumu o ka ʻākoakoa lehulehu ʻana o nā kānaka, a laila, haʻi maila nā kamaʻāina he ʻaha mokomoko ke kumu o ia lehulehu ʻana. | When they had come close in to the landing at Kauhola the chief asked why the crowd was gathering; then a native of the place said they were coming together for a boxing match. |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.4 sent.2 | Ma hope iho o kēia haunaele ʻana, hoʻomaka hou ka hoʻonoho o ke kahua mokomoko. | After the excitement the boxing field again settled into order; |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.4 sent.3 | I ia manawa, pili akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua ma ke kumulāʻau milo e nānā ana no ka hoʻouka kaua. | then Aiwohikupua leaned against the trunk of a milo tree to watch the attack begin. |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.5 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua naʻe e kū ana ma kona wahi, puka maila ʻo Ihuanu a kū i waena o ke kahua mokomoko e hōʻike ana iā ia iho i mua o ke anaina, a kāhea maila me ka leo nui, “ʻO wai ka mea ma kēlā aoʻao mai e hele mai e mokomoko?” | As Aiwohikupua stood there, Cold-nose entered the open space and stood in the midst to show himself off to the crowd, and he called out in a loud voice: "What man on that side will come and box?" |
| Ch.4 p.26 para.5 sent.2 | Akā, ʻaʻole e hiki i kekahi mea ke ʻaʻa mai e kū i mua o Ihuanu, no ka mea, ʻo ko Kohala ʻoi kelakela nō ia ma ka ikaika i ke kuʻikuʻi. | But no one dared to come and stand before Cold-nose, for the fellow was the strongest boxer in Kohala. |
| Ch.4 p.27 para.1 sent.3 | I ʻelua mai ma kou ʻaoʻao, hui pū me ʻoe, ʻakolu ʻoukou, a laila, mikomiko iki iho ka malihini.” | Take two on your side with you, three of you together, to satisfy the stranger." |
| Ch.4 p.27 para.2 sent.2 | ʻO wau nō ka ʻoi ma mua o nā kānaka a pau, a ke ʻōlelo mai nei hoʻi ʻoe i ʻekolu aku ma kēia aoʻao, a he aha lā ʻoe i mua oʻu?” | I am the best man here, and yet you talk of three from this side; and what are you compared to me?" |
| Ch.4 p.27 para.3 sent.1 | ʻŌlelo maila ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, “ʻAʻole au e ʻaʻa aku e hakakā me ʻoe ma kāu noi ke ʻole ʻoe e kū mai me nā mea ʻē aʻe ma kou aoʻao. | Answered Aiwohikupua, "I will not accept the challenge without others on your side, |
| Ch.4 p.27 para.4 sent.1 | A no kēia ʻōlelo a ʻAiwohikupua, hele maila kekahi o nā pūʻali ikaika a ma ke kua o ʻAiwohikupua, ʻōlelo maila, “ʻĒ! Mai ʻōlelo aku ʻoe iā Ihuanu. | At Aiwohikupua 's words, one of Cold-nose's backers came up behind Aiwohikupua and said: "Here! do not speak to Cold-nose; |
| Ch.4 p.27 para.4 sent.4 | I ia manawa, huli aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua a pale aʻela i ka mea nāna i ʻōlelo mai ma kona kua, hāʻule akula i lalo a make loa. | Then Aiwohikupua turned and gave the man at his back a push, and he fell down dead. |
| Ch.5 p.29 para.1 sent.1 | A ʻike maila ka ʻaha kanaka a pau o ke kahua mokomoko i ka ʻoi ʻana o ka ikaika o ʻAiwohikupua no ka make loa ʻana o ke kanaka ma ke pale wale ʻana nō, i ia manawa, hele maila kekahi mau pūʻali o Ihuanu a ʻōlelo maila iā Ihuanu penei, “E Ihuanu ē! | When all the players on the boxing field saw how strong Aiwohikupua was to kill the man with just a push; Then Cold-nose's backers went to him and said: "Here, Cold-nose, |
| Ch.5 p.29 para.1 sent.2 | Ke ʻike maopopo leʻa aku nei wau ʻānō i kēia manawa ʻaʻole e lanakila ana ko kākou aoʻao, a ma kuʻu manaʻopaʻa hoʻi, e lanakila ana ka malihini ma luna o kākou, no ka mea, ke ʻike maopopo akula nō ʻoe ua make loa ko kākou kanaka i ka wēlau wale nō o ko ia ala lima. | I see pretty plainly now our side will never get the best of it; I am sure that the stranger will beat us, for you see how our man was killed by just a push from his hand; |
| Ch.5 p.29 para.2 sent.2 | Mai hopohopo no ka make ʻana o kēlā kanaka o kākou ma ke pale ʻana i ka wēlau o kona lima. | don't get frightened because that man of ours was killed by a push from his hand. |
| Ch.5 p.29 para.2 sent.3 | ʻAʻole anei wau i hana pēlā i kekahi mau lā ma mua aʻe nei ma ʻaneʻi? | Didn't I do the same thing here some days ago? |
| Ch.5 p.29 para.2 sent.6 | Aia a lohe aku ʻoukou ua lanakila ʻo Ihuanu, a laila, hoʻomanaʻo ʻoukou i kuʻu puʻupuʻu iā Kanikapiha, ka ʻai a ke kumu i aʻo ʻole ʻia iā ʻoukou, no ka mea, ke ʻike nei wau ʻaʻole e lanakila mai ʻo ia ma luna oʻu, no ka mea, ua kani ka pola o kuʻu malo i kēia lā.” | When you hear that Cold-nose has conquered, then remember my blow called The-end-that-sang , the fruit of the tree which you have never tasted, the master's stroke which you have never learned. By this sign I know that he will never get the better of me, the end of my girdle sang to-day." |
| Ch.5 p.30 para.2 sent.1 | Iā Ihuanu naʻe e ʻōlelo kaena ana iā ia iho i mua o kona mau hoa no kona lanakila ma luna o ʻAiwohikupua, a laila, oi maila ʻo ʻAiwohikupua a kokoke iki ma ke alo o Ihuanu, ʻūpoʻipoʻi aʻela ʻo ia i kona mau lima ma ka poʻohiwi, me he moa kāne lā e hoʻomākaukau ana no ke kani ʻana, a ʻōlelo akula ʻo ia iā Ihuanu, “E Ihuanu! | While Cold-nose was boasting to his backers how he would overcome Aiwohikupua, then Aiwohikupua moved up and cocked his eye at Cold-nose, flapped with his arms against his side like a cock getting ready to crow, and said to Cold-nose, "Here, Cold-nose! |
| Ch.5 p.30 para.3 sent.3 | No laila, ke ʻōlelo nei wau i kēia, he hiki i kuʻu akua ke hāʻawi mai iaʻu e lanakila ma luna o kēia kanaka, a e hoʻolilo aʻe kuʻu akua i ke poʻo o ko ʻoukou ikaika i mea milimili na kuʻu mau hoe waʻa.” | for I say to him, my god can give me victory over this man, and my god will deliver the head of this mighty one to be a plaything for my paddlers." |
| Ch.5 p.30 para.4 sent.1 | A laila, kukuli ihola ʻo ʻAiwohikupua a pule akula i kona mau akua penei, “E Lanipipili, Laniʻoaka, Lanikahuliomealani, e Lono, e Hekilikaʻakaʻa a me Nākolowailani, i kēia lā, e ʻike mai ʻoukou iaʻu i kā ʻoukou kama, kā ʻoukou pua i koe ma ke ao nei. | Then Aiwohikupua knelt down and prayed to his gods as follows: "O you Heavens, Lightning, and Rain, O Air, O Thunder and Earthquake! Look upon me this day, the only child of yours left upon this earth. |
| Ch.5 p.30 para.4 sent.2 | Mai kēia lā, e hāʻawi mai ʻoukou i ka ikaika a pau ma luna o kā ʻoukou kama nei. | Give this day all your strength into your child; |
| Ch.5 p.30 para.4 sent.3 | E hiki nō iā ʻoukou ke hoʻohala i kāna puʻupuʻu ma kona kuʻi ʻana mai i kā ʻoukou kama, a ke noi aku nei wau e hāʻawi mai i ke poʻo o Ihuanu i kuʻu lima i mea pāʻani na koʻu mau hoe waʻa i ʻike ai kēia ʻaha a pau, ʻo wau ke lanakila ma luna o kēia kanaka i ʻoki poepoe ʻole ʻia. | by your might turn aside his fists from smiting your child, and I beseech you to give me the head of Ihuanu into my hand to be a plaything for my paddlers, that all this assembly may see that I have power over this uncircumcised one. |
| Ch.5 p.31 para.2 sent.1 | A lohe ke kumu kuʻi a Ihuanu i kēia mau ʻōlelo, hele maila a ma ka ʻaoʻao o Ihuanu, ʻī maila, “Hāwāwā ʻoe, e kuʻu haumāna. | When Cold-nose's master heard these words he went to Cold-nose's side and said, "You are foolish, my pupil. |
| Ch.5 p.31 para.3 sent.3 | I ia manawa, e waiho koke mai ana ʻo Ihuanu i ka puʻupuʻu, hū ka makani ma ka pāpālina o ʻAiwohikupua, ʻaʻole naʻe i kū, no ka mea, ua ʻalo ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, ʻo ia ka mea i hala ai. | Then Cold-nose instantly delivered a blow like the whiz of the wind at Aiwohikupua's face, but Aiwohikupua dodged and he missed it. |
| Ch.5 p.31 para.4 sent.1 | A hala ka puʻupuʻu a Ihuanu, e waiho koke aʻe ana ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i kāna puʻupuʻu, kū nō i ka houpo, hulā ma ke kua. | As the blow missed, Aiwohikupua instantly sent his blow, struck right on the chest and pierced to his back; |
| Ch.5 p.31 para.4 sent.2 | I ia manawa, kaʻikaʻi aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i ke kanaka me kona lima, a koali aʻela iā Ihuanu i mua o ke anaina, a kiola akula i waho o ka ʻaha a lanakila ihola ʻo ʻAiwohikupua ma luna o Ihuanu. | then Aiwohikupua lifted the man on his arm and swung him to and fro before the crowd, and threw him outside the field, and Aiwohikupua overcame Cold-nose, |
| Ch.5 p.31 para.7 sent.1 | Holo akula kā lākou nei a kau i Honokaʻope ma Waipiʻo, ma laila aku a waho o Pāʻauhau, nānā aʻela lākou, e kū ana ka ʻeʻa o ka lepo o uka. | They sailed and touched at Honokaape at Waipio, then came off Paauhau and saw a cloud of dust rising landward. |
| Ch.5 p.32 para.2 sent.2 | Aia naʻe lākou ma kahi kaʻawale mai e nānā ana i ka ʻaha. | there they stood at a distance watching the people. |
| Ch.5 p.32 para.3 sent.1 | A laila, hele maila kekahi kamaʻāina ma ko lākou nei wahi e noho ana. | Then came one of the natives of the place to where they stood |
| Ch.5 p.32 para.6 sent.2 | A hele akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, a wehe aʻela i kona kīhei a kāʻei aʻela ma kona pūhaka. | and Aiwohikupua came, took off his cape, and bound it about his waist. |
| Ch.5 p.32 para.7 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua ma ka ʻaha, ʻōlelo akula ʻo ia i mua o Hāunakā, “ʻAʻole e ʻeha ke keiki Kauaʻi iā ʻoe. | When Aiwohikupua was on the field he said to Haunaka, "You can never hurt the Kauai boy: |
| Ch.5 p.32 para.8 sent.3 | Hoʻokahi nō kuʻi iā Ihuanu, hulā pū ka puʻupuʻu ma ke kua, a ʻo ke kanaka nō kēia i make mai nei ʻo Ihuanu.” | Only one blow at Cold-nose and the fist went through to his back. This is the very man who killed Cold-nose." |
| Ch.5 p.32 para.9 sent.2 | A haʻalele lākou i ia wahi, hele pū akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā me ke aikāne a kau lākou lā ma nā waʻa a holo akula a pae i Laupāhoehoe. | and they left the place; Aiwohikupua's party went with their friends and boarded the canoes, and went on and landed at Laupahoehoe. |
| Ch.6 p.33 para.1 sent.1 | (Ma ka mokuna ʻelima o keia kaʻao, ua ʻike kākou ua hiki aku ʻo ʻAiwohikupua ma Laupāhoehoe. | In Chapter V of this story we have seen how Aiwohikupua got to Laupahoehoe. |
| Ch.6 p.33 para.1 sent.2 | Ma ʻaneʻi, e kamaʻilio iki kākou no Hulumāniani, ka makāula nāna i ukali mai ʻo Lāʻieikawai mai Kauaʻi mai, ka mea i ʻōlelo mua ʻia ma ka helu mua o keia kaʻao.) | Here we shall say a word about Hulumaniani, the seer, who followed Laieikawai hither from Kauai, as described in the first chapter of this story. |
| Ch.6 p.33 para.2 sent.1 | I ka lā a ʻAiwohikupua mā i haʻalele ai iā Pāʻauhau ma Hāmākua, i ka lā hoʻi i holo mai ai a hiki i Laupāhoehoe, ua ʻike mua akula ka makāula i nā mea a pau i kekahi ahiahi iho ma mua o ko ʻAiwohikupua hiki ʻana ma Laupāhoehoe, a penei kona ʻike ʻana. | On the day when Aiwohikupua's party left Paauhau, at Hamakua, on the same clay as he sailed and came to Laupahoehoe, the prophet foresaw it all on the evening before he arrived, and it happened thus: |
| Ch.6 p.33 para.2 sent.2 | I ua ahiahi lā, ma mua o ka napoʻo ʻana o ka lā, e noho ana ka makāula ma ka puka o ka hale. | That evening before sunset, as the seer was sitting at the door of the house, |
| Ch.6 p.33 para.2 sent.3 | Nānā akula ʻo ia i ke kukū o nā ʻōpua ma ka nānā ʻana i nā ʻōuli o ke ao a like me ka mea mau i ka poʻe kilokilo mai ka wā kahiko mai a hiki i kēia manawa. | he saw long clouds standing against the horizon where the signs in the clouds appear, according to the soothsayers of old days even until now. |
| Ch.6 p.33 para.4 sent.2 | Ma ka ʻōpua kaʻu ʻike ʻana akula. | in the clouds I find it; |
| Ch.6 p.34 para.1 sent.1 | I ia pō a ao aʻe, ma hope o ka ʻauinalā, ʻike hou akula ʻo ia i ke kū a ka pūnohu i ka moana ma ka hōʻailona i kū iā ʻAiwohikupua e like me ka mea i maʻa i ua makāula nei. | A night and a day passed; toward evening he again saw the cloud rise on the ocean in the form which the seer recognized as Aiwohikupua's — |
| Ch.6 p.34 para.5 sent.2 | Mai luna mai o Kaiwilahilahi, hahau ihola ka makāula i ka puaʻa i mua o ke aliʻi, a pule akula ʻo ia ma ka inoa o nā akua o ʻAiwohikupua, a eia kāna pule, “E Lanipipili, e Laniʻoaka, e Lanikahuliomealani, e Lono, e Hekilikaʻakaʻa, e Nākolowailani. | he advanced from Kaiwilahilahi, threw the pig before the chief, and prayed in the name of the gods of Aiwohikupua. and this was his prayer: "O Heavens, Lightning, and Rain; O Air, Thunder, and Earthquake; |
| Ch.6 p.34 para.8 sent.2 | A ʻo ʻAiwohikupua hoʻi, apo akula ma nā poʻohiwi o kāna kauā a uē helu ihola. | and Aiwohikupua hugged his servant's shoulders and wailed out his virtues. |
| Ch.6 p.35 para.1 sent.1 | Haʻi akula ke kauā e like me kā kākou heluhelu ʻana ma nā mokuna mua. | The servant, told him all that we have read about in former chapters. |
| Ch.6 p.35 para.1 sent.2 | I ia manawa a ka makāula i ʻōlelo aku ai i ke aliʻi i nā kumu a me nā kuleana o kona hele ʻana, a pau ia, a laila, na ka makāula ka nīnau hope iā ʻAiwohikupua, akā hoʻi, ma ka pāʻewaʻewa o kā ke aliʻi ʻōlelo ʻana me ka ʻōlelo aku he huakaʻi kaʻapuni kāna. | When the seer had told the business on which he had come and his reason for it, that was enough. Then it was the seer's turn to question Aiwohikupua, but the chief told only half the story, saying that he was on a sight-seeing tour. |
| Ch.6 p.35 para.2 sent.3 | E nānā ʻoe i kēlā ānuenue e piʻo maila, aia i laila ʻo Lāʻieikawai, ka mea a kāua e kiʻi nei, a ma laila nō kahi i loaʻa ai iaʻu.” | See that rainbow arch? Laieikawai is there, the one whom you want to find, and there
is where I found her. |
| Ch.6 p.35 para.4 sent.1 | A ma kēia ʻōlelo a ke aliʻi, hekau ihola nā waʻa o lākou i ke kai. | At the chief's proposal they anchored their canoes in the sea, |
| Ch.6 p.35 para.4 sent.2 | Piʻi akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua me kona kuhina a hiki i Kūkululaumania ma ke kauhale o nā kamaʻāina, a noho ihola ma laila e kali ana no ka mālie o ka ua. | and Aiwohikupua went up with his counsellor to Kukululaumania to the houses of the natives of the place and stayed there waiting for pleasant weather. |
| Ch.6 p.35 para.4 sent.3 | A hala nā lā ʻehā ma laila, haʻalele loa ka mālie o Hilo, ʻike maopopo ʻia akula ke kālaʻe ʻana mai o ka ʻāina a waiho wale mai ʻo Panaʻewa. | After four days it cleared over Hilo: the whole country was plainly visible, and Panaewa lay bare. |
| Ch.6 p.36 para.1 sent.1 | Piʻi akula lāua i loko o nā ulu lāʻau loloa, i ka hihia paʻa o ka nāhelehele me ka luhi a hiki lāua ma kahi e kokoke ana i Paliuli, lohe lāua i ka leo o ka moa. | They made way with difficulty through high forest trees and thickets of tangled brush, until, at a place close to Paliuli, they heard the crow of a cock. |
| Ch.6 p.36 para.3 sent.2 | A maopopo iā ʻAiwohikupua ke kokoke hiki o lāua i ka hale o Lāʻieikawai, nonoi akula ʻo ia e hāʻawi mai kahi kanaka i ka ʻahuʻula i paʻa iho ai ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i ia mea ma kona lima a hiki i ko lāua launa ʻana me ke aliʻi wahine o Paliuli. | When Aiwohikupua saw that they were approaching Laieikawai's house, he asked for the feather cloak to hold in his hand when they met the princess of Paliuli. |
| Ch.6 p.36 para.4 sent.1 | A hala ka mahina ʻai, ʻike akula lāua i ka hale o Lāʻieikawai, ua uhi ʻia me nā hulu melemele o ka ʻōʻō e like me ka ʻōlelo a ke akua i ka makāula ma ka hihiʻo i luna o Kaʻuiki. | The garden patch passed, they beheld Laieikawai's house covered with the yellow feathers of the oo bird, as the see had seen in his vision from the god on Kauwiki. |
| Ch.7 p.37 para.1 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua mā i haʻalele ai iā Paliuli, hoʻi akula lāua a hiki i Keaʻau, hoʻomākaukau nā waʻa, a ma ia wanaʻao, kau ma luna o nā waʻa a hoʻi i Kauaʻi. | When Aiwohikupua and his companion had left Paliuli they returned and came to Keaau, made the canoe ready, and at the approach of day boarded the canoe and returned to Kauai. |
| Ch.7 p.37 para.1 sent.2 | Ma ia hoʻi ʻana, ʻaʻole naʻe i haʻi aku ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i kekahi kumu o ka hoʻi ʻana, aia i ka hiki ʻana i Kauaʻi. | On the way back Aiwohikupua would not say why he was returning until they reached Kauai; |
| Ch.7 p.37 para.1 sent.3 | Ma kēia hoʻi ʻana, ʻakahi nō a ʻike kona kuhina i ke kumu. | then, for the first time, his counsellor knew the reason. |
| Ch.7 p.37 para.2 sent.1 | Ma kēia holo ʻana mai Keaʻau mai a kau i Kamaeʻe ma Hilopalikū, a ma kekahi lā aʻe, haʻalele lākou iā laila, hiki lākou i Humuʻula ma ka palena o Hilo me Hāmākua. | On the way from Keaau they rested at Kamaee, on the rocky side of Hilo, and the next day left there, went to Humuula on the boundary between Hilo and Hamakua; |
| Ch.7 p.37 para.3 sent.3 | ʻAlawa aʻela ke aliʻi a ʻike akula he mea ʻē o ka wahine maikaʻi, a no kēia mea, kauoha aʻela ke aliʻi i nā hoe waʻa e hoe pololei aku ma kahi a ka wahine e noho mai ana, a holo akula a kokoke. | The chief turned his head to look, and saw that the stranger was, indeed, a charming woman. So the chief ordered the boatmen to row straight to the place where the woman was sitting, and as they approached |
| Ch.7 p.37 para.3 sent.4 | Hālāwai mua ihola lākou me ke kanaka e paeaea ana, nīnau akula, “ʻO wai kēlā wahine e noho maila i luna o ka pali ma luna pono ou?” | they first encountered a man fishing with a line, and asked, "Who is that woman sitting
up there on the bank directly above you? " |
| Ch.7 p.38 para.2 sent.1 | A no ka manaʻo nui o ke aliʻi e ʻike i kēlā wahine, peʻahi ʻia akula a iho koke maila kēlā me kona ʻaʻahu kapa i hoʻopuni ʻia i ka hau, a hāʻawi maila i kona aloha iā ʻAiwohikupua, a aloha akula nō hoʻi ke aliʻi kāne i kona aloha ma ka lūlū lima ʻana. | As the chief had a great desire to see the woman, she was beckoned to: and she approached with her cloak all covered with snow and gave her greeting to Aiwohikupua, and he greeted her in return by shaking hands. |
| Ch.7 p.38 para.3 sent.1 | Iā lāua e hālāwai malihini ana, ʻī aku ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, “E Poliʻahu ē, e ka wahine maikaʻi o ka pali, pōmaikaʻi wale wau iā ʻoe ma ko kāua hālāwai ʻana iho nei. | After meeting the stranger, Aiwohikupua said, "O Poliahu, fair
mistress of the coast, happily are we met here; |
| Ch.7 p.38 para.3 sent.3 | Ma kāu mau ʻōlelo e ʻōlelo ai a ma laila wale nō wau. | whatever commands you utter I will obey. |
| Ch.7 p.38 para.3 sent.4 | Inā hoʻi e ʻae ʻoe e lawe iaʻu e like me kaʻu e noi aku nei iā ʻoe, a laila, e kau kāua ma luna o nā waʻa a holo aku i Kauaʻi. | If you consent to take me as I beseech you, then come on board the canoe and go to Kauai. |
| Ch.7 p.38 para.5 sent.1 | ʻŌlelo akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, “ʻAkahi nō wau a maopopo no Mauna Kea mai ʻoe, a ua loaʻa koke kou inoa iā mākou ma ka haʻi ʻia ʻana e kēlā kanaka paeaea.” | Said Aiwohikupua, "This is the first I knew about your coming from the White Mountain, but we found out your name readily from that fisherman yonder." |
| Ch.7 p.38 para.6 sent.1 | “A no kāu noi, e ke Aliʻi,” wahi a Poliʻahu, “e lawe wau iā ʻoe i kāne naʻu, a no laila, ke haʻi aku nei wau iā ʻoe me ka nīnau aku, ʻaʻole anei ʻo ʻoe ke aliʻi i kū i luna a hoʻohiki ma ka inoa o kou mau akua ʻaʻole ʻoe e lawe i hoʻokahi wahine o kēia mau mokupuni mai Hawaiʻi nei a Kauaʻi; aia kāu wahine lawe no loko mai o Moaʻulanuiākea? | "As to what the chief desires of me," said Poliahu. "I will take you for my husband; and now let me ask you, are you not the chief who stood up and vowed in the name of your gods not to take any woman of these islands from Hawaii to Kauai to wife — only a woman who conies from Moaulanuiakea? |
| Ch.7 p.39 para.2 sent.1 | Ma mua o ka holo ʻana, ʻōlelo aku ka wahine iā ʻAiwohikupua, “Ke holo pū nei kākou. | Before setting out the woman said to Aiwohikupua and his companion, "We sail together; |
| Ch.7 p.39 para.3 sent.1 | Iā lākou ma Kohala a hiki i ka lā i haʻalele ai ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā iā Kohala, lawe aʻela ʻo Poliʻahu i kona kapa hau, a hāʻawi akula iā ʻAiwohikupua me ka ʻōlelo aku, “ʻO kuʻu kapa hau he kapa i pāpā loa ʻia e koʻu mau mākua ʻaʻole e lilo i kekahi mea ʻē aʻe; iaʻu wale iho nō. | They reached Kohala, and on the day when Aiwohikupua's party left, Poliahu took her garment of snow and gave it to Aiwohikupua, saying. "Here is my snow mantle, the mantle my parents strictly forbade my giving to anyone else; it was to be for myself alone; |
| Ch.7 p.39 para.3 sent.2 | Akā, no ko kāua lawe ʻana iā kāua i kāne hoʻāo ʻoe naʻu, a pēlā hoʻi wau iā ʻoe, no laila, ke hāʻawi lilo aku nei wau i kēia kapa a hiki i kou lā e manaʻo mai ai iaʻu ma nā hoʻohiki a kāua, a laila, loaʻa kou kuleana e ʻimi aʻe ai iaʻu a loaʻa i luna o Mauna Kea, a laila, hōʻike aʻe ʻoe iaʻu, a laila, hui kino kāua.” | but as we are betrothed, you to me and I to you, therefore I give away this mantle until the day when you remember our vows, then you must seek me, and you will find me above on the White Mountain; show it to me there, then we shall be united." |
| Ch.8 p.41 para.1 sent.1 | A hiki ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā i Hāna mai Kohala aku ma hope iho o ko lākou hoʻokaʻawale ʻana iā Poliʻahu, ma ke awa pae waʻa o Haneoʻo ko lākou hiki mua ʻana ma ko Hinaikamalama wahi e noho ana. | When Aiwohikupua reached Hana, after parting with Poliahu at Kohala. his boat approached the canoe landing at Haneoo, where they had been before, where Hinaikamalama was living. |
| Ch.8 p.41 para.1 sent.2 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua naʻe i hiki aku ai ma kēlā awa pae waʻa, i ka moana nō lākou i lana aku ai, a iā lākou e lana ana ma laila, ʻike maila ʻo Hinaikamalama no ʻAiwohikupua kēia mau waʻa. | When Aiwohikupua reached the landing the canoe floated on the water: and as it floated there Hinaikamalama saw that it was Aiwohikupua's canoe: |
| Ch.8 p.41 para.2 sent.1 | Hele mai ʻo Hinaikamalama a ma kahi a ʻAiwohikupua mā e lana ana, ʻī akula ka wahine, “He mea kupanaha! | Hinaikamalama came thither where Aiwohikupua and his men floated. Said the woman. "This is strange! |
| Ch.8 p.41 para.2 sent.4 | No laila, ke nīnau aku nei wau iā ʻoe, ma laila nō anei ʻoukou e lana ai a holo aku?” | Now, tell me, shall you float there until you leave?" |
| Ch.8 p.43 para.1 sent.5 | Inā e lohe ʻia ma kēia hope aku, a laila, i lohe ʻia nō iā ʻoukou, a ʻo ka uku o ka mea nāna e haʻi kēia ʻōlelo no ka holo ʻana i Hawaiʻi, ʻo ka make ka mea nāna e ʻōlelo. | if this is heard about, it will be heard through you, and the penalty to anyone who tells of the
journey to Hawaii, it is death, death to himself, |
| Ch.8 p.43 para.2 sent.1 | A hiki lākou i Kauaʻi ma ka napoʻo ʻana o ka lā a hālāwai me nā kaikuahine, i ia manawa ka hoʻopuka ʻana i ʻōlelo i kona mau kaikuahine penei, “Iaʻu i hele aku nei i kaʻu huakaʻi hele, ua haʻohaʻo paha ʻoukou, no ka mea, ʻaʻole wau i haʻi aku iā ʻoukou i ke kumu o ia hele ʻana. | Aiwohikupua reached Kauai at sunset and met his sisters. Then he spoke thus to his sisters: "Perhaps you wondered when I went on my journey, because I did not tell you my reason, |
| Ch.8 p.43 para.2 sent.7 | ʻO ʻoukou nō ka poʻe e loaʻa ai koʻu makemake, a ma kēia wanaʻao, e kū kākou a e hele.” | the very ones to win what I wish, and at dawn let us rise up and go." |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.1 sent.1 | I ka wanaʻao o ia pō, haʻalele lākou iā Kauaʻi, hiki ma Puʻuloa, a ma laila aku a kau ma Hanauma. | That night, at the approach of day, they left Kauai, came to Puuloa, and there rested at Hanauma; |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.1 sent.2 | I kekahi lā aʻe, kau i Molokaʻi ma Kaunakakai; ma laila aku a pae i Māla ma Lahaina. | the next day they lay off Molokai at Kaunakakai, from there they went ashore at Mala at Lahaina; |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.1 sent.3 | A haʻalele lākou i ia wahi, hiki lākou i Keoneʻōʻio ma Honuaʻula, a ma laila i noho lōʻihi ai, ʻekolu anahulu, no ka mea, ua nui ka ʻino ma ka moana. | and they left the place, went to Keoneoio in Honuaula, and there they stayed 30 days. For it was very rough weather on the ocean; |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.1 sent.5 | I ia manawa ko lākou haʻalele ʻana iā Honuaʻula a holo akula a hiki ma Kaʻelehuluhulu ma Kona, Hawaiʻi. | Then they left Honuaula and sailed and came to Kaelehuluhulu, at Kona, Hawaii. |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.2 sent.2 | Hoʻokahi malama ke kali ʻana o Poliʻahu no ko lāua hoʻāo e like me kā lāua hoʻohiki ʻana, akā, ua hala ʻo ʻAiwohikupua ma Hilo no ke kiʻi nō iā Lāʻieikawai. | one month she waited for the promised meeting, but Aiwohikupua was at Hilo after Laieikawai. |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.3 sent.2 | Ma ko Poliʻahu ʻano kupua kēia ʻike ʻana, a no ia mea, waiho wale nō i loko o ka wahine kona manaʻo, aia a hālāwai lāua, a laila, hōʻike aku i kāna mea e ʻike nei no kā ʻAiwohikupua mau hana. | through her supernatural power she saw it all; so the woman laid it up in her mind until they should meet, then she showed what she saw Aiwohikupua doing. |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.4 sent.1 | Ma kēia holo ʻana a ʻAiwohikupua mai Kaʻelehuluhulu aku, hiki mua lākou ma Keaʻau, akā, ua nui nō nā lā a me nā pō o kēia hele ʻana. | From Kaelehuluhulu, Aiwohikupua went direct to Keaau. but many days and nights the voyage lasted. |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.5 sent.1 | I ke awakea o kekahi lā, hiki aku lākou ma Keaʻau. | At noon one day they came to Keaau, |
| Ch.8 p.44 para.6 sent.1 | Ma mua o ko lākou piʻi ʻana i Paliuli, kauoha ihola ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i nā hoʻokele a me nā hoe waʻa, “Eia mākou ke hele nei i kā mākou huakaʻi hele, ka mea hoʻi a kuʻu manaʻo i kau nui ai a hālāwai maka. | Before going up to Paliuli. Aiwohikupua told the steersmen and the paddlers, ''While we go on our way to seek her whom I have so longed to see face to face, |
| Ch.8 p.45 para.1 sent.1 | A laila, lawe aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua iā Mailehaʻiwale, i ka hānau mua o lākou e like me ko lākou hānau ʻana, kū ihola ma ka puka ponoʻī o ka hale o Lāʻieikawai. | Then Aiwohikupua took Mailehaiwale, the first born; she stood right at the door of Laieikawai's house, |
| Ch.8 p.45 para.1 sent.2 | Iā Mailehaʻiwale e kū lā ma ka puka o ka hale aliʻi, kuʻu aku ana kēia i ke ʻala, pō ʻo loko i ke ʻala. | and as she stood there she sent forth a fragrance which filled the house; |
| Ch.9 p.47 para.1 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ka manawa i hōʻole ʻia ai ko ke aliʻi kāne makemake, a laila ʻōlelo akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i kona kuhina, “E hoʻi kāua a e noho nā kaikuahine oʻu i uka nei, a na lākou nō e ʻimi aʻe i ko lākou wahi e noho ai, no ka mea ʻaʻole a lākou waiwai. | After this refusal, then Aiwohikupua said to his counsellor, "You and I will go home and let my sisters stay up here; as for them, let them live as they can, for they are worthless; |
| Ch.9 p.48 para.1 sent.1 | Hele akula ʻo Mailekaluhea a ma ka puka o ka hale aliʻi, kū ihola, kuʻu akula i ke ʻala. | Mailekaluhea went and stood at the door of the chief-house and gave out a perfume: |
| Ch.9 p.49 para.11 sent.1 | I ia manawa, kēnā koke aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua iā Mailepākaha, hele akula a kū ma ka puka o ka hale aliʻi. | Then Aiwohikupua quickly ordered Mailepakaha to go and stand at the door of the chief-house; she gave forth her perfume, |
| Ch.10 p.51 para.2 sent.1 | Iā lāua e hele ana ma ke ala, kani akula ke oli a Mailehaʻiwale penei: | and as the two were still on the way, rang the song of Mailehaiwale, as follows: |
| Ch.10 p.52 para.1 sent.1 | A hala akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā, kūkā ihola nā kaikuahine i ko lākou manaʻo a hoʻoholo ihola lākou e ukali ma hope o ke kaikunāne me ka manaʻo e maliu mai. | When Aiwohikupua and his companion had departed, the sisters conferred together and agreed to follow him, thinking he could be pacified. |
| Ch.10 p.52 para.1 sent.3 | Noho ihola nā kaikuahine ma ke awa e kali ana no ke kāhea ʻia mai. | At the landing the sisters sat waiting to be called; |
| Ch.10 p.52 para.1 sent.4 | A pau lākou i ke kau ma luna o nā waʻa, ʻaʻole naʻe kāhea ʻia mai. | all had gone aboard the canoe, there was no summons at all, |
| Ch.10 p.52 para.5 sent.2 | A hala akula lākou lā ma nā waʻa, noho ihola nā kaikuahine, kūkā ihola i manaʻo no lākou. | and the canoe having departed, the sisters sat conferring, |
| Ch.10 p.52 para.5 sent.4 | Eia kāna ʻōlelo, “He nani ia ua maliu ʻole maila ko kākou kaikunāne aliʻi i kā Mailehaʻiwale a me Mailekaluhea i kā lāua ualo aku, e aho e hele nō kākou ma uka a kahi e pae aʻe ai lākou, a laila, na Mailelauliʻi e kaukau aku i ko kākou kaikunāne. | These were her words: "It is clear that our brother chief is not pacified by the entreaties of Mailehaiwale and Mailekaluhea. Let us, better, go by land to their landing place, then it will be Mailelaulii's turn to sing. |
| Ch.10 p.53 para.1 sent.1 | A haʻalele lākou iā Keaʻau, hiki mua nā kaikuahine i Punahoa ma kahi i kapa ʻia ʻo Kānoakapa. | They left Keaau, came first to Punahoa, to a place called Kanoakapa, |
| Ch.10 p.53 para.1 sent.2 | Noho iho lākou ma laila, hiki hope ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā. | and sat down there until Aiwohikupua's party arrived. |
| Ch.10 p.53 para.2 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua mā i ʻaneʻane ai e pae mai ma kahi a nā kaikuahine e noho aku ana, ʻike maila ʻo ʻAiwohikupua e noho aku ana kona mau kaikuahine. | When Aiwohikupua and his companions had almost come to land where the sisters were sitting. |
| Ch.10 p.53 para.3 sent.1 | Iā lākou i haʻalele ai i kahi a nā kaikuahine e noho ana, hea akula ʻo Mailelauliʻi ma hope ma ke mele penei: | As they left the sisters sitting there, Mailelaulii sang a song, as follows: |
| Ch.10 p.53 para.7 sent.3 | Hoʻolohe aku kākou ʻo ka leo o ke kāhea mai, a kau kākou ma luna o nā waʻa, a laila palekana.” | now we shall hear them calling to us, and go on board the canoe, then we shall be safe." |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.3 sent.1 | ʻAʻole naʻe he ʻae o kahi muli loa, a laila, hōʻailona ihola lākou ma ka huhuki ʻana i nā pua mauʻu. | But the youngest would not consent; then they drew lots by pulling the flower stems of grass; |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.4 sent.1 | A pau kā lākou hana ʻana no kēia mau mea, haʻalele lākou iā Punahoa, hele ukali hou maila lākou ma kahi e loaʻa ai ko lākou kaikunāne. | When this was done, they left Punahoa, again followed their
brother |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.4 sent.4 | Noho maila lākou nei ma kahi kaʻawale, a pēlā nō hoʻi ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā ma kahi kaʻawale. | Here they camped at some distance from Aiwohikupua's party, and Aiwohikupua's party from them. |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.5 sent.1 | Iā lākou ma Honoliʻi i ia pō, kūkā ihola lākou e moe kekahi poʻe a e ala hoʻokahi, a holo ia mea iā lākou. | At Honolii that night they arranged that the others should sleep and a single one keep watch, and to this all consented. |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.5 sent.3 | ʻO ke kumu o ia hana ʻana a lākou pēlā, i ike ʻia ka manawa holo ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā, no ka mea, ua maʻa kona mau kaikuahine i ka holo ʻana mai mai Kauaʻi mai, ma ka wanaʻao e holo ai. | This was in order to see Aiwohikupua's start, for on their journey from Kauai the party had always set out at dawn. |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.7 sent.1 | Iā lākou e ʻōkuʻu nui ana, ʻo kā Kahalaomāpuana waki ia, kau lākou ma nā waʻa. | As the sisters crouched there Kahalaomapuana 's watch came, and the party boarded the canoe. |
| Ch.10 p.54 para.7 sent.2 | Hoʻokoke akula kona mau kaikuahine ma ke awa, a ʻo Kahalaomāpuana ka mea i hele loa aku a paʻa ma hope o nā waʻa, a kāhea aku ma ke mele, penei: | The sisters followed down to the landing, and Kahalaomapuana ran and clung to the back of the canoe and called to them in song, as follows: |
| Ch.10 p.55 para.1 sent.16 | Ma hope aku mākou ou, | After you we followed, |
| Ch.10 p.56 para.2 sent.2 | I ia manawa, hoʻopuka akula kona kaikuahine i ʻōlelo hope ma ke mele penei: | Then, for the last time she spoke to her brother in a song, as follows: |
| Ch.11 p.57 para.2 sent.1 | (Ma ʻaneʻi e waiho iki i ke kamaʻilio ʻana no ʻAiwohikupua. | (Here we must leave Aiwohikupua for a little |
| Ch.11 p.57 para.3 sent.1 | I ia manawa a ʻAiwohikupua mā i haʻalele aku ai i nā kaikuahine ma Honoliʻi a lawe pū aku iā Kahalaomāpuana, nui loa ihola ke aloha a me ka uē ʻana no ko lākou kaikaina. | When Aiwohikupua's party forsook his sisters at Honolii and took Kahalaomapuana with them, the girls mourned for love of their younger sister, |
| Ch.11 p.57 para.5 sent.1 | Iā lākou nō e uē ana, hōʻea mai ana ʻo Kahalaomāpuana ma ka pali mai, a laila, ua kuʻu ʻia ka naʻau kaumaha o kona mau kaikuaʻana. | While they were still mourning Kahalaomapuana appeared by the cliff; then their sorrow was at an end. |
| Ch.11 p.57 para.5 sent.2 | A hui aʻela lākou me ko lākou kaikaina, a haʻi akula ʻo ia i kāna hana a me ke kumu o kona hoʻi ʻana mai e like me ka mea i ʻōlelo mua ʻia aʻe nei ma kēia mokuna. | They crowded about their younger sister, and she told them what had happened to her and why she had returned, as has been told in the chapter before. |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.1 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ko lākou kūkā ʻana no lākou iho, haʻalele lākou iā Honoliʻi, hoʻi akula a uka o Paliuli ma kahi e kokoke aku ana i ka hale o Lāʻieikawai, noho ihola lākou ma loko o nā pūhā lāʻau. | After their council they left Honolii and returned to the uplands of Paliuli, to a place near Laieikawai's house, and lived there inside of hollow trees. |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.3 sent.1 | “ʻAe,” wahi a ko lākou kaikaina, “e hoʻā kākou i ahi ma kēlā pō kēia pō a e oli aku ka hānau mua, a laila, i ka muli iho, pēlā a pau kākou i hoʻokahi nō olioli ʻana a ka mea hoʻokahi ma ka pō, a laila, iaʻu ka pō hope loa. | "yes," said their younger sister, "let us burn a fire every night, and let the oldest sing, then the next, and so on until the last of us, only one of us sing each night, then I will come the last night; |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.3 sent.3 | A ma kēia ʻōlelo a Kahalaomāpuana, ua pono ia i mua o lākou. | Kahalaomapuana's words pleased them. |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.5 sent.1 | I ka lima o ka pō, ʻo ia ko Kahalaomāpuana pō, ʻo ka hope loa nō hoʻi ia, hoʻā ihola ke ahi, a ma ka waenakonu o ka pō, hana ihola ʻo Kahalaomāpuana he pū lāʻī a hoʻokani akula. | On the fifth night, Kahalaomapuana's night, the last night of all, they lighted the fire, and at midnight Kahalaomapuana made a trumpet of a ti leaf and played on it. |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.5 sent.3 | A ma ka pili o ke ao, hoʻokani hou akula ʻo Kahalaomāpuana i kāna pū lāʻī e like me ke kani mua ʻana, a laila, ua lilo ihola nō ia i mea leʻaleʻa no ke aliʻi. | And just before daylight Kahalaomapuana played again on her ti leaf trumpet as before, then this delighted the princess. |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.6 sent.1 | I ka lua o ka pō, hana hou nō ʻo Kahalaomāpuana i kāna hana, ma ka pili naʻe o ke ahiahi kāna hoʻomaka ʻana e hoʻokani. | The second night Kahalaomapuana did the same thing again; she began early in the evening to play, |
| Ch.11 p.58 para.7 sent.1 | Ma ka pili o ka wanaʻao o ia pō nō, ka lua ia o ka hoʻokani ʻana. | Just before daylight that night she, played a second time. |
| Ch.11 p.59 para.1 sent.2 | Hoʻokolo akula ʻo ia a hiki i kahi o ke ahi e ʻā ana, ma ke kaʻawale naʻe kēia kahi i kū aku ai me ka ʻike ʻole mai a lākou lā iā ia nei. | crept along until she came to the place where the fire was, and stood at a distance where she was out of sight of those about the fire. |
| Ch.11 p.59 para.2 sent.3 | Hele aku nei wau a hiki, a ma ke kaʻawale koʻu kū ʻana aku me ka ʻike ʻole mai o lākou lā iaʻu, aia hoʻi, ʻike akula wau he mau kaikamāhine ʻelima e noho ana a puni ke ahi. | and I went and came and stood at a distance without being myself seen. There behold! I saw five girls sitting around the fire, |
| Ch.11 p.59 para.4 sent.3 | A lawe ʻia akula ʻo Kahalaomāpuana, a laila, ua hoʻohauʻoli ʻia ka naʻau o kona mau kaikuaʻana no ka manaʻo nō e loaʻa ana ka pōmaikaʻi ma hope. | When Kahalaomapuana was carried away, the hearts of the sisters sang for joy, for they thought to win fortune thereafter. |
| Ch.11 p.59 para.5 sent.4 | ʻElua hoʻi mau manu ʻiʻiwi pōlena e kau ana ma nā poʻohiwi o ke aliʻi e lū ana i nā wai ʻala lehua ma ke poʻo o ke aliʻi. | two scarlet iiwi birds were perched on the shoulders of the princess and shook the dew from red lehua blossoms upon her head. |
| Ch.11 p.59 para.7 sent.1 | A pālua kāna nīnau ʻana, a laila, ala aʻela ke kaikamahine a ʻōlelo akula i ke kahu o ke aliʻi me ka ʻī aku, “E ʻae mai ʻoe iaʻu e hoʻi au me oʻu kaikuaʻana ma kahi i loaʻa ai wau iā ʻoe, no ka mea, ua ʻeʻehia wau i ka makaʻu no ke ʻano ʻē loa o kāu aliʻi.” | And twice she asked, then the girl arose and said to the princess's attendant as follows: "Permit me to return to my sisters, to the place from which you took me, for I tremble with fear at the marvelous nature of your princess." |
| Ch.11 p.61 para.6 sent.1 | Lālau aʻela ʻo Kahalaomāpuana i kāna pū lāʻī ma kona pepeiao, hoʻokani akula i mua o ke aliʻi, a laila, ua hoʻoleʻaleʻa ʻia ʻo Lāʻieikawai. | Kahalaomapuana took her ti leaf trumpet from behind her ear, and played before the princess; then Laieikawai was delighted. |
| Ch.12 p.63 para.1 sent.2 | He mea mau ia, ma ka pō wale nō e kani ai nei mea kani, ʻaʻole e pono ma ke ao,” a no kēia ʻōlelo a ke kaikamahine, kāhāhā loa ihola ʻo Lāʻieikawai me ka manaʻo he wahaheʻe na ke kaikamahine. | and this instrument is a kind that sounds only by night; it will never sound by day." |
| Ch.12 p.63 para.1 sent.3 | A laila, lālau akula ʻo Lāʻieikawai i ka pū lāʻī ma ka lima o ke kaikamahine a hoʻokani ihola, a no ko Lāʻieikawai maʻa ʻole i ka hoʻokani ka pū lāʻī, no laila, ua loaʻa ʻole ke kani ma ia hoʻokani ʻana, a laila, he mea maopopo loa i ke aliʻi wahine he mea kani ʻole nō ka pū lāʻī ke hoʻokani ma ke ao. | Laieikawai was surprised at these words, thinking the girl was lying. So she snatched the trumpet out of the girl's hand and played upon it. and because she was unpracticed in playing the trumpet the thing made no sound; then the princess believed that the trumpet would not sound by day. |
| Ch.12 p.63 para.2 sent.1 | ʻŌlelo akula ʻo Lāʻieikawai iā Kahalaomāpuana, “Ke makemake nei wau e hoʻāikāne kāua, a ma koʻu hale nei ʻoe e noho ai. | Said Laieikawai to Kahalaomapuana, "Let us two be friends, and you shall live here in my house |
| Ch.12 p.63 para.4 sent.1 | “ʻEhia ʻoukou ka nui,” wahi a Lāʻieikawai, “a pehea ko ʻoukou hiki ʻana ma ʻaneʻi?” | "How many of you are there? " asked Laieikawai, "and how did you come here?" |
| Ch.12 p.64 para.1 sent.3 | A ma ka huakaʻi a ko mākou kaikunāne, ʻo ia ko mākou mea i hiki ai ma ʻaneʻi, a no ka loaʻa ʻole ʻana iā mākou o kona makemake, no laila, ua haʻalele kēlā iā mākou, a ua hoʻi akula ko mākou kaikunāne me kona kōkoʻolua, a ke noho nei mākou me ka makamaka ʻole.” | And we journeyed hither with our brother, and because we failed to gain for him his wish, therefore he has abandoned us and has gone back with his favorite companion, and we live here in distress." |
| Ch.12 p.64 para.9 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula ʻo Lāʻieikawai, “Inā ʻo ʻoukou kai hiki mai i kēlā pō, a laila, na wai i alakaʻi iā ʻoukou ma kēia wahi, no ka mea, he wahi ʻike ʻole ʻia kēia, ʻakahi wale nō poʻe i hele mai i kēia wahi.” | Said Laieikawai, "If you were the ones who came that night, who guided you here? For the place is unfrequented, not a single person comes here." |
| Ch.12 p.64 para.11 sent.2 | A laila, ma ka mana o Waka kona kupuna wahine, ua hikiwawe loa, ua paʻa ka hale. | Then, through the supernatural power of her grandmother, Waka, the matter was quickly dispatched, the house was made ready. |
| Ch.12 p.64 para.13 sent.1 | A hala akula ʻo Kahalaomāpuana a hui me kona mau kaikuaʻana, nīnau maila naʻe kona mau kaikuaʻana i kāna hana a me ke ʻano o ko lāua hālāwai ʻana me ke aliʻi, haʻi akula kēlā, “Iaʻu i hiki aku ai a ma ka puka o ka hale o ke aliʻi, wehe akula kahi kuapuʻu nāna i kiʻi mai nei iaʻu, a i kuʻu ʻike ʻana aku nei i ke aliʻi e kau mai ana i luna o ka ʻēheu o nā manu, no ia ʻike ʻana oʻu, ua ʻeʻehia wau me ka makaʻu a hāʻule akula wau i lalo ma ka lepo. | When Kahalaomapuana rejoined her sisters they asked what she had done — what kind of interview she had had with the princess. Answered the girl, "When I reached the door of the palace a hunchback opened the door to receive me, and when I saw the princess resting on the wings of birds, at the sight I trembled with fear and fell down to the earth. |
| Ch.12 p.65 para.1 sent.1 | Hele akula lākou a kū ma ka puka o ka hale aliʻi, wehe aʻela ke kahu o Lāʻieikawai i ka puka a ʻike akula lākou e like me ka ʻōlelo a ko lākou kaikaina. | They went and stood at the door of the chief-house. Laieikawai's attendant opened the door, and they saw just what their sister had described to them. |
| Ch.12 p.65 para.1 sent.3 | A ma ke kauoha a ke aliʻi, ua kiʻi aku ka poʻe malihini a lawe ʻia maila i mua o ke aliʻi, a he mea ʻoluʻolu ia i ko ke aliʻi manaʻo. | And at the princess's command the strangers were brought into the presence of the princess, and the princess was pleased with them. |
| Ch.12 p.65 para.2 sent.1 | Iā lākou e hālāwai ana me ke aliʻi wahine, hoʻopuka maila ʻo ia i mua o nā malihini he ʻōlelo hoʻopōmaikaʻi, penei nō ia, “Ua lohe wau i ko ʻoukou kaikaina he poʻe ʻoukou no ka hanauna hoʻokahi, a he poʻe koko like ʻoukou, a no laila, ke lawe nei au iā ʻoukou ma ke ʻano o ke koko hoʻokahi. | And at this interview with the princess she promised them her protection, as follows: "I have heard from your younger sister that you are all of the same parentage and the same blood; therefore I shall treat you all as one blood with me, |
| Ch.12 p.65 para.2 sent.3 | Ma ka ʻōlelo a kekahi, ma laila like kākou. | Whatever one says, the others shall do. |
| Ch.12 p.65 para.2 sent.7 | Pēlā e pono ai kākou ma kēia hope aku.” | So shall it be well with us from this time on." |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.1 sent.1 | A pau kā lākou ʻōlelo ʻana me ke aliʻi no kēia mau mea, hoʻihoʻi ʻia akula lākou a ma ka hale i hoʻomākaukau ʻia no lākou. | After talking with the princess concerning all these things, they were dismissed to the house prepared for them. |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.1 sent.2 | I ua mau kaikamāhine nei e noho ana ma kou lākou hale, he mea mau iā lākou ke kūkā mau ma nā mea e pili ana iā lākou a me ke aliʻi, no ko lākou noho ʻana a me nā hana a ke aliʻi e ʻōlelo mai ai. | As soon as the girls went to live in the house they consulted how they should obey the princess's commands, |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.1 sent.3 | A hoʻoholo aʻela lākou e hoʻolilo i ko lākou kaikaina i hoa kūkā no ke aliʻi ma nā hana e pili ana i kou lākou noho ʻana. | and they appointed their younger sister to speak to the princess about what they had agreed upon. |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.2 sent.1 | I kekahi awakea, i ko ke aliʻi manawa ala mai ka hiamoe mai, hele akula ʻo Kahalaomāpuana e hoʻoleʻaleʻa i ke aliʻi ma ka hoʻokanikani ʻana i ka pū lāʻī a pau ko ke aliʻi makemake. | One afternoon, just as the princess woke from sleep, came Kahalaomapuana to amuse the princess by playing on the trumpet until the princess wished it no longer. |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.3 sent.1 | ʻĪ maila ʻo Lāʻieikawai, “Ke ʻae aku nei wau e like me kā ʻoukou mau ʻōlelo hoʻoholo, a ʻo ʻoukou nō ka mana ma Paliuli nei a puni.” | Said Laieikawai, "I consent to your agreement, and yours shall be the guardianship over all the land of Paliuli." |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.5 sent.1 | Noho ihola lākou ma Paliuli. | Thus they dwelt in Paliuli, |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.5 sent.2 | I loko naʻe o ko lākou noho ʻana, ʻaʻole lākou i ʻike i ko lākou luhi ma ia noho ʻana. | and while they dwelt there never did they weary of life. |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.5 sent.5 | A no kēia mea, ua lilo ʻo Paliuli i ʻāina aloha loa na lākou, a ma laila lākou i noho ai a hiki i ka haunaele ʻana iā Halaaniani. | So Paliuli became to them a land beloved, and there they dwelt until the trouble came upon them which was wrought by Halaaniani. |
| Ch.12 p.66 para.6 sent.1 | (Ma ʻaneʻi, e ka mea heluhelu, e waiho i ke kamaʻilio ʻana no nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua, a ma ka mokuna ʻumikumamākolu o kēia kaʻao, e kamaʻilio hou no ʻAiwohikupua no kona hoʻi ʻana i Kauaʻi). | (Here, O reader, we leave speaking of the sisters of Aiwohikupua, and in Chapter XIII of this tale will speak again of Aiwohikupua and his coming to Kauai.) |
| Ch.13 p.67 para.1 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ko Kahalaomāpuana lele ʻana i loko o ke kai mai luna iho o nā waʻa, e holo ikaika loa ana nā waʻa i ia manawa, no laila, ua hala hope loa ʻo Kahalaomāpuana. | At the time when Kahalaomapuana leaped from the canoe into the sea it was going very swiftly, so she fell far behind. |
| Ch.13 p.67 para.2 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua i hoʻi ai mai Hawaiʻi mai a hiki ma waena o Oʻahu nei a me Kauaʻi, ʻōlelo akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i kona mau hoe waʻa penei, “I ko kākou hoʻi ʻana ʻaneʻi a hiki i Kauaʻi, mai ʻōlelo ʻoukou i Hawaiʻi aku nei kākou i o Lāʻieikawai lā o hilahila auaneʻi au, no ka mea, he kanaka wau ua waia i ka ʻōlelo ʻia, a no laila, ke haʻi aku nei au i kaʻu ʻōlelo paʻa iā ʻoukou. | As Aiwohikupua sailed away from Hawaii, between Oahu and Kauai he spoke to his paddlers as follows: "When we get back to Kauai let no one tell that we have been to Hawaii after Laieikawai, lest shame come to me and I be spoken of jeeringly; and therefore I lay my commands upon you. |
| Ch.13 p.67 para.3 sent.2 | A i ka mākaukau ʻana o ka ʻahaʻaina pālala a ke aliʻi, kauoha aʻela ke aliʻi i kāna ʻōlelo e kiʻi aku i nā hoa ʻai, ma nā aliʻi kāne wale nō, a hoʻokahi wale nō aliʻi wahine i ʻae ʻia e komo i ka ʻahaʻaina pālala, ʻo ia ʻo Kaʻiliokalauokekoa. | While the feast was being made ready the chief gave word to fetch the feasters; with all the male chiefs, only one woman of rank was allowed to come to the celebration; this was Kailiokalauokekoa. |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.1 sent.1 | I ka lā i ʻahaʻaina ai, ʻākoakoa maila nā hoa ʻai a pau loa, ua mākaukau nā mea ʻai, a ʻo ka ʻawa ko lākou mea inu ma ia ʻahaʻaina ʻana. | On the day of the feast all the guests assembled, the food was ready spread, and the drink at the feast was the awa. |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.1 sent.2 | Ma mua o ko lākou pāʻina ʻana, lālau like nā hoa i nā ʻapu ʻawa a inu ihola. | Before eating, all the guests together took up their cups of awa and drank. |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.1 sent.5 | Ma kēia inu ʻawa hope o lākou, ua loʻohia mai ma luna o lākou ka ʻona ʻawa, akā, hoʻokahi mea ʻoi aku o ka ʻona, ʻo ke aliʻi nāna ka papa ʻaina. | When this cup of awa was drained the effect of the awa overcame them. But the one who felt the effects most was the chief who gave the feast. |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.2 sent.1 | I loko o kēlā manawa ʻona o ke aliʻi, a laila, ua nalo ʻole ka ʻōlelo paʻa āna i ʻōlelo ai i kona mau hoe waʻa ma ka moana. | Now, while the prince was drunk, the oath which he swore at sea to the rowers was not forgotten; |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.2 sent.2 | ʻAʻole naʻe i lohe ʻia ma o kāna poʻe i pāpā ai, akā, ma ka waha ponoʻī nō o ʻAiwohikupua i lohe ʻia ai ka ʻōlelo huna a ke aliʻi. | not from one of his own men was the forbidden story told, but from the mouth of Aiwohikupua himself was the prince's secret heard. |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.3 sent.1 | A ʻona ihola ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, a laila, hāliu pono akula ʻo ia ma kahi a Kauakahialiʻi e noho mai ana, ʻōlelo akula, “E Kauakahialiʻi ē, iā ʻoe nō e kamaʻilio ana iā mākou no Lāʻieikawai, komo koke ihola i loko oʻu ka makemake no kēlā wahine, no laila, moe ʻino koʻu mau pō e ake e ʻike. | While under the influence of the awa, Aiwohikupua turned right around upon Kanakahialii, who was sitting near, and said: "O Kanakahialii, when you were talking to us about Laieikawai, straightway there entered into me desire after that woman; then sleepless were my nights with the wish to sec her; |
| Ch.13 p.68 para.5 sent.3 | A i nele ʻoe ma kēia hele ʻana āu, a laila, lilo kou mau ʻāina iaʻu. | and should you lose in this journey then your lands become mine, |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.1 sent.1 | A pau kā ʻAiwohikupua mā ʻōlelo ʻana no kēia mau mea, i ia pō iho, kau ʻo Hauaʻiliki mā ma luna o nā waʻa a holo akula, akā, ua nui nō nā lā i hala ma ia holo ʻana. | After Aiwohikupua had finished speaking, that very night, Hauailiki boarded the double canoe and set sail, but many days passed on the journey. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.3 sent.1 | A i kekahi lā aʻe ma ka ʻauinalā, hiki akula lākou i Keaʻau. | And on the next day, in the afternoon, when they reached Keaau, |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.5 sent.1 | I kekahi lā aʻe ma ka puka ʻana a ka lā, uhi ana ke ʻawa a me ka noe ma Keaʻau a puni, a i ka mao ʻana aʻe, aia hoʻi ʻehiku mau wāhine e noho ana ma ke awa pae o Keaʻau, a hoʻokahi ʻoi o ia poʻe. | Next day at sunrise the mist and fog covered all Keaau, and when it cleared, behold! seven girls were sitting at the landing place of Keaau, one of whom was more beautiful than the rest. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.5 sent.2 | ʻAkahi wale nō a iho nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua ma kēia hele ʻana o Lāʻieikawai e like me kāna ʻōlelo hoʻopōmaikaʻi. | This was the very first time that the sisters of Aiwohikupua had come down with Laieikawai, according to their compact. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.6 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai mā e noho ana ma kēlā kakahiaka, kū aʻela ʻo Hauaʻiliki a holoholo aʻela i mua o lākou lā e hōʻike ana iā ia iho ma kona ʻano kanaka uʻi me ka manaʻo e maliu ʻia mai e ke Aliʻi wahine o Paliuli. | As Laieikawai and her companions were sitting there that morning, Hauailiki stood up and walked about before them, showing off his good looks to gain the notice of the princess of Paliuli. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.7 sent.1 | ʻEhā nā lā o Lāʻieikawai o ka hiki ʻana ma Keaʻau ma hope iho o ko Hauaʻiliki puka ʻana aku, a ʻehā nō hoʻi lā o ko Hauaʻiliki hōʻike ʻana iā ia i mua o Lāʻieikawai, a ʻaʻole naʻe he maliu iki ʻia mai. | Four days Laieikawai came to Keaau after Hauailiki's entering the harbor: and four days Hauailiki showed himself off before Laieikawai, and she took no notice at all of him. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.7 sent.2 | I ka lima o ka lā o ko Lāʻieikawai hiki ʻana ma Keaʻau, manaʻo ihola ʻo Hauaʻiliki e hōʻike iā ia iho i mua o kāna mea e ʻiʻini nui nei no kona akamai ma ka heʻe nalu. | On the fifth day of her coming. Hauailiki thought to display before the beloved one his skill with the surf board; |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.7 sent.3 | He ʻoiaʻiʻo! ʻO Hauaʻiliki nō ka ʻoi ma Kauaʻi no ke akamai i ka heʻe nalu, a ʻo ia nō ka ʻoi i loko o kona mau lā, a he keiki kaulana hoʻi ʻo ia ma ke akamai i ka heʻe nalu, a kaulana nō hoʻi no kona uʻi. | the truth is Hauailiki surpassed anyone else on Kauai as an expert in surf riding, he surpassed all others in his day, and he was famous for this skill as well as for his good looks. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.8 sent.1 | I ia lā nō, i ka puka ʻana o ka lā, aia nā kamaʻāina ma kūlana nalu, nā kāne a me nā wāhine. | That day, at daybreak, the natives of the place, men and women, were out in the breakers. |
| Ch.13 p.69 para.8 sent.2 | I nā kamaʻāina e ʻākoakoa ana ma kūlana heʻe nalu, wehe aʻela ʻo Hauaʻiliki i kona ʻaʻahu kapa, hopu ihola i kona papa heʻe nalu (he olo) a hele akula a ma kahi e kūpono ana iā Lāʻieikawai mā, kū ihola ʻo ia no kekahi mau minuke. | While the people were gathering for surfing, Hauailiki undid his garment, got his surf board, of the kind made out of a thick piece of wili wili wood, went directly to the place where Laieikawai's party sat, and stood there for some minutes; |
| Ch.13 p.70 para.3 sent.2 | Iā Hauaʻiliki ma kūlana nalu, kāhea maila kekahi kaikamahine kamaʻāina, “Pae hoʻi kākou.” | When Hauailiki was out in the surf, one of the girls called out, "Land now!" |
| Ch.13 p.70 para.4 sent.1 | “Heʻe aku paha!” wahi a Hauaʻiliki, no ka mea, ʻaʻole ona makemake e heʻe pū ʻo ia me ka lehulehu ma ka nalu hoʻokahi. | "Land away!" answered Hauailiki, for he did not wish to ride in on the same breaker with the crowd. |
| Ch.13 p.70 para.4 sent.2 | Makemake nō ʻo ia e hoʻokāʻokoʻa iā ia, ʻo ia wale nō ma ka nalu ʻokoʻa i kumu e ʻike mai ai ʻo Lāʻieikawai no kona akamai i ka heʻe nalu; malia o makemake ʻia mai ʻo ia. | He wished to make himself conspicuous on a separate breaker, in order that Laieikawai should see his skill in surf riding and maybe take a liking to him. |
| Ch.14 p.71 para.1 sent.1 | A ʻike maopopo aʻela ʻo Hauaʻiliki ʻaʻole i komo i loko o Lāʻieikawai ka makemake iā Hauaʻiliki ma ia mea, hoʻopau aʻela ʻo ia i ka heʻe nalu ma ka papa; manaʻo aʻela ʻo ia e kaha. Haʻalele ihola ʻo ia i kona papa a ʻau akula i kūlana heʻe nalu. | When Hauailiki saw that Laieikawai still paid no attention to him he made up his mind to come in on the surf without the board. |
| Ch.14 p.71 para.3 sent.1 | Iā Hauaʻiliki ma kūlana nalu i ka nalu i ea mai ai a kākala ma kona kua, i ia manawa, kaha maila ʻo ia i ka nalu. | When Hauailiki got to the breakers, just as the crest rose and broke at his back, he stood on its edge, |
| Ch.14 p.71 para.3 sent.2 | Piʻi ke kai me he niho puaʻa lā ma ʻō a ma ʻō o kona ʻāʻī, i ia manawa, ʻuā ka pihe o uka. | the foam rose on each side of his neck like boars' tusks. Then all on shore shouted |
| Ch.14 p.71 para.4 sent.1 | A ʻike akula ʻo Hauaʻiliki i ko Lāʻieikawai ʻakaʻaka ʻana iho, manaʻo ihola ʻo ia ua komo ka makemake iā Lāʻieikawai ma kēia hana a Hauaʻiliki, a laila, hoʻomau akula ʻo ia ma ke kaha nalu. | When Hauailiki saw Laieikawai smiling to herself he thought she had taken a liking to him because of this feat, so he kept on repeating it |
| Ch.14 p.71 para.4 sent.2 | A hala ʻelima nalu, ʻaʻole i loaʻa ka hea mai a Lāʻieikawai iā ia nei, no laila, he mea kaumaha loa ia iā Hauaʻiliki ka maliu ʻole mai o Lāʻieikawai iā ia nei, a he mea hilahila nui loa hoʻi nona, no ka mea, ua ʻōlelo kaena mua kēlā iā ʻAiwohikupua e like me kā kākou ʻike ʻana ma nā mokuna ma mua aʻe, a no kēia mea, lana mālie ihola ʻo ia ma kūlana nalu. | until five breakers had come in; no summons came to him from Laieikawai. Then Hauailiki was heavy-hearted because Laieikawai took no notice of him, and he felt ashamed because of his boast to Aiwohikupua, as we have seen in the last chapter. So he floated gently on the waves, |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.1 sent.2 | ʻĪ ihola ʻo Hauaʻiliki, ʻo ia wale nō, “ʻAʻole nō kā hoʻi ʻoe e kala i makemake ai, hoʻolohi wale iho nō,” a no ka peʻahi a ke aliʻi wahine o Paliuli, hoʻomoe ihola kēia i ka nalu a pae pono akula ma kahi a Lāʻieikawai mā e noho mai ana. | Hauailiki boasted to himself, "You wanted me all the time; you just delayed." And at the signal of the princess of Paliuli he lay upon the breaker and landed right where Laieikawai and her companions were sitting; |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.1 sent.3 | I ia manawa, hāʻawi maila ʻo Lāʻieikawai i ka lei lehua, hoʻolei ihola ma ka ʻāʻī o Hauaʻiliki e like me kāna hana mau i ka poʻe akamai i ka heʻe nalu. | then Laieikawai threw a lehua wreath around Hauailiki's neck, as she always did for those who showed skill in surf riding. |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.1 sent.4 | A ma hope iho o ia manawa, e uhi ana ka noe a me ka ʻohu, a i ka mao ʻana aʻe, ʻaʻole ʻo Lāʻieikawai mā. | And soon after the mist and fog covered the land, and when it passed away nothing was to be seen of Laieikawai and her party; |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.4 sent.1 | Ma ka ʻauinalā ma hope o ka ʻaina awakea, piʻi akula lāua i uka, komo akula i loko o nā ulu lāʻau i ka hihia paʻa o ka nahele. | In the afternoon, after dinner, the two went up inland and entered the forest where it was densely overgrown with underbrush. |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.4 sent.3 | ʻIke maila ʻo ia iā lāua nei e kokoke aku ana i ʻō i ʻaneʻi lā, ʻī maila, “E Hauaʻiliki, ma laila ʻolua, hoʻi aku. | When she saw them approaching from a distance, she cried, "O Hauailiki, you two go back from there, |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.4 sent.4 | ʻAʻole o ʻolua kuleana e piʻi mai ai i ʻaneʻi, no ka mea, ua hoʻonoho ʻia mai wau ma ʻaneʻi he kiaʻi maka mua no ke aliʻi, a naʻu nō e hoʻokuke aku i nā mea a pau i hiki mai ma ʻaneʻi me ke kuleana ʻole. | you two have no business to come up here, for I am the outpost of the princess's guards and it is my business to drive back all who come here; |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.6 sent.1 | ʻĪ maila ʻo Mailehaʻiwale, “ʻAʻole wau e ʻae aku i ko ʻolua manaʻo, no ka mea, ʻo koʻu kuleana nō ia i hoʻonoho ʻia ai ma kēia wahi e kipaku aku i ka poʻe hele mai i uka nei e like me ʻolua.” | Said Mailehaiwale, "I will not let you; for I am put here to drive off everybody who comes up here like you two." |
| Ch.14 p.72 para.7 sent.1 | Iā Hauaʻiliki mā i hala aku ai ma hope iho o ko Mailehaʻiwale hoʻokuʻu ʻana aku iā lāua, hālāwai koke akula lāua me Mailekaluhea, ka lua o kā ke aliʻi wahine kiaʻi. | As they went on, after Mailehaiwale let them pass, they soon encountered Mailekaluhea, the second of the princess's guardians. |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.2 sent.2 | Akā, ma kēlā ʻōlelo a Mailekaluhea, ua ʻoi aku ka maʻalea o kā lāua nei ʻōlelo malimali i mua o ia ala, no laila, ua hoʻokuʻu ʻia aku lāua. | But to Mailekaluhea's command they answered so craftily with flattering words that they were allowed to pass. |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.3 sent.3 | Iā lāua i hiki aku ai i mua o Mailepākaha, ʻaʻole he ʻoluʻolu iki o kēia kiaʻi i ko lāua hoʻokuʻu ʻia ʻana mai e nā kiaʻi mua, akā, no ka pākela o ka maʻalea ma ke kamaʻilio ʻana, ua hoʻokuʻu ʻia akula lāua. | When they came before Mailepakaha this guardian was not at all pleased at their having been let slip by the first guards, but so crafty was their speech that they were allowed to pass. |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.4 sent.1 | A hala aku lāua, aia hoʻi, ʻike akula lāua iā Kahalaomāpuana ke kiaʻi ma ka puka o ka hale aliʻi e kau mai ana i luna o ka ʻēheu o nā manu, a ʻike akula nō hoʻi i ke ʻano ʻē o ka hale aliʻi. | And they went on, and behold! they came upon Kahalaomapuana, the guardian at the door of the chief-house, who was resting on the wings of birds, and when they saw how strange was the workmanship of the chief-house, |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.5 sent.1 | Iā Kahalaomāpuana i ʻike mai ai iā lāua nei, he mea ʻē kona huhū, a laila, kāhea maila ʻo ia me kona mana ma ke ʻano ʻalihikaua no ke aliʻi, “E Hauaʻiliki ē! | When Kahalaomapuana saw them she was angry, and she called out to them authoritatively, as the princess's war chief, "O Hauailiki! |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.6 sent.2 | Ala aʻela ia a holo wikiwiki akula a hiki ma Keaʻau ma ke kakahiaka nui. | he arose and ran swiftly until he reached Keaau in the early morning. |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.6 sent.3 | Ma kēia hele ʻana a lāua i uka o Paliuli, ua nui ka luhi, a no ia luhi, hāʻule akula lāua a hiamoe. | For weariness of the journey up to Paliuli, they fell down and slept. |
| Ch.14 p.73 para.8 sent.3 | I ka lima o ka pō o ka hoʻomau ʻana o kēia moeʻuhane iā Hauaʻiliki, ma ka pili o ke ahiahi, ala aʻela ʻo ia a piʻi akula i uka o Paliuli me ka ʻike ʻole naʻe o kona hoa. | On the fifth night after the dream had come to Hauailiki so repeatedly, after dark, he arose and ascended to the uplands of Paliuli without his comrade's knowledge. |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.1 sent.1 | Iā ia i piʻi aku ai, ʻaʻole ʻo ia i hele aku ma ke alanui mua a lāua i piʻi mua ai a ma kahi e kokoke aku ana iā Mailehaʻiwale. | In going up, he did not follow the road the two had taken before, but close to Mailehaiwale |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.1 sent.2 | Hele aʻela kēia ma kahi kaʻawale a pakele akula i nā maka o nā kiaʻi o ke aliʻi. | he took a new path and escaped the eyes of the princess's guardians. |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.3 sent.1 | Iā ia i komo aku ai a kū ma kahi a ke aliʻi e moe ana, lālau akula ʻo ia i ke poʻo o ke aliʻi a hoʻoluliluli aʻela. | When he had entered and stood where the princess was sleeping, he caught hold of the princess's head and shook her. |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.3 sent.2 | I ia manawa, puoho maila ʻo Lāʻieikawai mai ka hiamoe ʻana, aia hoʻi, e kū ana ʻo Hauaʻiliki ma kona poʻo, a he mea pono ʻole ia i ko ke aliʻi wahine manaʻo. | Then Laieikawai started up from sleep, and behold! Hauailiki standing at her head, and her mind was troubled. |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.4 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula ʻo Hauaʻiliki, “E ke Aliʻi, e honi kāua, no ka mea, iaʻu i piʻi mai ai i uka nei i kēia mau pō aku nei lā, ua hiki mai wau i uka nei me ko ʻike ʻole, akā, ma ka mana o kou mau kiaʻi, ua kipaku ʻia wau. | Hauailiki said, "O Princess, let us kill one another, for a few nights ago I came up and got here without seeing you; we were driven away by the power of your guards, |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.4 sent.3 | Iaʻu e hiamoe ana, hālāwai pū ihola kāua ma ka moeʻuhane a kahaʻula ihola kāua, a ua nui nā lā a me na pō o ka hoʻomau ʻana iaʻu o kēia mea, no laila wau i piʻi mai nei e hoʻokō i ka hana i ka moeʻuhane.” | while I slept we two met together in a dream and we were united, and many days and nights the same dream came; therefore I have come up here again to fulfill what was done in the dream." |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.5 sent.2 | ʻAʻole oʻu manaʻo i kāu mea e ʻōlelo mai nei, no ka mea, ua loaʻa nō ia mea iaʻu ma ka moeʻuhane, ua hana nō e like me ka hana iā ʻoe, a he aha lā ia mea iaʻu? | what you say is no concern of mine; for the same thing has come to me in a dream and it happened to me as it happened to you, and what is that to me? |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.8 sent.1 | A ma hope, ala aʻela ʻo Kahalaomāpuana, a komo akula i ka hale aliʻi. | Soon Kahalaomapuana arose and entered the house, |
| Ch.14 p.74 para.8 sent.5 | Ua ʻōlelo aku wau iā ʻoe i kēlā pō ma mua ʻaʻole ou kuleana ma kēia wahi! | I told you before that you had no business in this place, |
| Ch.14 p.75 para.1 sent.2 | A ma ka wanaʻao, haʻalele lākou iā Keaʻau a hoʻi akula. | and with the dawn left Keaau and sailed thither. |
| Ch.14 p.75 para.2 sent.1 | Iā Hauaʻiliki mā i hoʻi aku ai i Kauaʻi a hiki lākou ma Wailua, ʻike akula ʻo ia, e ʻākoakoa mai ana nā aliʻi a me nā kaukaualiʻi a Kauakahialiʻi a me Kaʻiliokalauokekoa kekahi i kēlā manawa. | When Hauailiki's party returned to Kauai and came to Wailua, he saw a great company of the high chiefs and low chiefs of the court, and Kauakahialii and Kailiokalauokekoa with them. |
| Ch.14 p.75 para.2 sent.2 | Iā Hauaʻiliki mā e hoʻokokoke aku ana ma ka nuku o ka muliwai ʻo Wailua, ʻike akula ʻo ia iā ʻAiwohikupua, kāhea akula, “Ua eo wau iā ʻoe.” | As Hauailiki and his party were nearing the mouth of the river at Wailua, he saw Aiwohikupua and called out, "I have lost." |
| Ch.15 p.77 para.2 sent.1 | I kēlā manawa a nā aliʻi a pau e ʻākoakoa nei ma Wailua, a laila, kū maila ʻo ʻAiwohikupua a haʻi maila i kona manaʻo i mua o nā aliʻi, “ʻAuhea ʻoukou. | Now, while all the chiefs were gathered at Wailua, then Aiwohikupua stood up and declared his intention in presence of the chiefs: "Where are you! |
| Ch.15 p.77 para.4 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ia mau lā, hoʻolale aʻela ʻo ia i kona mau pūʻali koa kiaʻi a me kona hanohano aliʻi a pau. | After this he summoned the bravest of his fighting men, his bodyguard, all his chiefly array, |
| Ch.15 p.77 para.5 sent.2 | Ma hope iho o ia mau lā, hoʻolale aʻela ʻo ia i kona mau pūʻali koa kiaʻi a me kona hanohano aliʻi a pau. | After this he summoned the bravest of his fighting men, his bodyguard, all his chiefly array, |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.1 sent.1 | He nui nā lā i hala ma ia holo ʻana. | Many days they sailed. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.1 sent.2 | A hiki lākou ma Kohala, i ia manawa, ʻakahi nō a maopopo i ko Kohala poʻe ʻo ʻAiwohikupua kēia, ke kupua kaulana a puni nā moku. | When they came to Kohala, for the first time the Kohala people recognized Aiwohikupua, a magician renowned all over the islands. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.1 sent.3 | A no ko ke aliʻi hūnā ʻana iā ia ma kēlā hiki ʻana ma Kohala i hakakā ai me Ihuanu, ʻo ia ka mea i ʻike ʻole ʻia ai. | And because the chief came in disguise to Kohala when he fought with Cold-nose, this was why they had not recognized him. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.3 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai mā i hoʻi aku ai ma kēlā lā a ʻAiwohikupua mā i hiki aku ai, ua ʻike mua mai ko lākou kupuna wahine i ko ʻAiwohikupua hiki ʻana ma Keaʻau. | When Laieikawai and her companions returned, on the day when
Aiwohikupua's party arrived, their grandmother had already fore-
seen Aiwohikupua's arrival at Keaau. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.3 sent.2 | ʻĪ maila ʻo Waka, “Ua hiki hou maila ʻo ʻAiwohikupua ma Keaʻau i kēia lā, no laila, e kiaʻi ʻoukou me ka mākaukau. | Said Waka, "Aiwohikupua has come again to Keaau, so let the guard be watchful, |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.3 sent.4 | Mai iho ʻoukou ma ke kai. | do not go down to the sea, |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.3 sent.5 | E noho ʻoukou ma uka nei a hiki i ka hoʻi ʻana o ʻAiwohikupua i Kauaʻi.” | stay here on the mountain until Aiwohikupua returns to Kauai." |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.4 sent.1 | A lohe ke koa kiaʻi nui o ke aliʻi wahine i kēia ʻōlelo a ko lākou kupuna wahine, i ia manawa, kauoha koke aʻela ʻo Kahalaomāpuana iā Kihanuilūlūmoku ko lākou akua e hoʻokokoke mai ma ka hale aliʻi e hoʻomākaukau no ka hoʻouka kaua. | When the princess's head guard heard her grandmother's words, then Kahalaomapuana immediately ordered Kihanuilulumoku, their god, to come near the home of the chief and prepare for battle. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.5 sent.1 | Ma ko Kahalaomāpuana ʻano kiaʻi nui no ke aliʻi, kauoha aʻela ʻo ia i kona mau kaikuaʻana e kūkākūkā lākou ma nā mea e pono ai ke aliʻi. | As the princess's chief guard, she ordered her sisters to consult what would be the best way to act in behalf of the princess. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.5 sent.2 | Iā lākou i ʻākoakoa ai, kūkākūkā ihola lākou ma nā mea kūpono iā lākou, a eia kā lākou mau ʻōlelo hoʻoholo ma o ka noʻonoʻo lā o Kahalaomāpuana ke koa kiaʻi nui o ke aliʻi, “ʻO ʻoe, e Mailehaʻiwale, inā e hiki mai ʻo ʻAiwohikupua a hālāwai ʻolua, e kipaku aku ʻoe iā ia, no ka mea, ʻo ʻoe nō ke kiaʻi mua loa. | When they met and consulted what was best to be done, all agreed to what Kahalaomapuana, the princess's chief guard, proposed, as follows: "You, Mailehaiwale, if Aiwohikupua should come hither, and you two meet, drive him away, for you are the first guard; |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.5 sent.4 | A inā i paʻakikī loa mai ma kona ʻano keiki kāne ʻana, e hoʻokuke ikaika aku iā ia. | and if he is very persistent, because he is a brother, resist him still more forcibly; |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.5 sent.5 | A inā i nui mai ka paʻakikī, a laila, e hoʻouna aʻe ʻoe i kekahi manu kiaʻi ou i oʻu lā, a laila, e hele mai au e hoʻohui iā kākou ma kahi hoʻokahi, a naʻu ponoʻī e kipaku aku iā ia. | and if he still insists then despatch one of the guardian birds to me, then we will all meet at the same place, and I myself will drive him away. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.6 sent.1 | Ma ka wanaʻao o ia pō iho, hiki ana ʻo ʻAiwohikupua me kona kuhina. | At dawn that night arrived Aiwohikupua with his counsellor. |
| Ch.15 p.78 para.6 sent.5 | Ua like nō ko ʻAiwohikupua manaʻo ma kēia pahu kapu me kona manaʻo mua. | [Aiwohikupua thought the same of it as he had the one before.] |
| Ch.15 p.79 para.5 sent.2 | He manawa ʻole, hoʻohui aʻela kēia iā lākou a ʻehā ma ko Mailekaluhea wahi kiaʻi, a ma laila i manaʻo ai lākou e hālāwai me ʻAiwohikupua. | in less than no time the four met at the place guarded by Mailekaluhea, where they expected to meet Aiwohikupua. |
| Ch.16 p.81 para.1 sent.3 | Pane maila ke kiaʻi nui, “E hoʻi ʻolua ʻānō! Mai lohi, a ʻaʻole hoʻi e kali, no ka mea, ua kapu ke aliʻi! ʻAʻole nō ou kuleana ma kēia wahi, a ʻaʻole nō hoʻi e hiki iā ʻoe ke manaʻo mai he mau kaikuahine mākou nou; ua hala i ia manawa!” | Said the head guard, "Return at once, linger not, delay not your going, for the princess is taboo, you have not the least business in this place; and never let the idea come to you that we are your sisters; that time has passed." |
| Ch.16 p.81 para.2 sent.2 | Ma ia manawa, manaʻo ihola ʻo ia e hoʻi a kai o Keaʻau, a laila, hoʻouna mai i kona mau pūʻali koa e luku i nā kaikuahine. | He decided at that time to go back to the sea to Keaau, then send his warriors to destroy the younger sisters. |
| Ch.16 p.81 para.3 sent.3 | A hiki ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā i kai o Keaʻau, i ia manawa, hoʻolale aʻela ke kuhina o ʻAiwohikupua i nā pūʻali koa o ke aliʻi e piʻi e luku i nā kaikuahine ma ke kauoha a ke aliʻi. | As soon as Aiwohikupua and his companion reached the sea at Keaau, Aiwohikupua's counsellor dispatched the chief's picked fighting men to go up and destroy the sisters, according to the chief's command. |
| Ch.16 p.81 para.4 sent.3 | No laila, e noho mākaukau ʻoukou ma ka inoa o ko kākou akua.” | so let us be ready in the name of our god." |
| Ch.16 p.83 para.2 sent.1 | Ma ka pō ʻana iho, piʻi akula nā kānaka he ʻumi a ke aliʻi i wae aʻe e luku i nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua, a ʻo ka hope kuhina ka ʻumikumamākahi ma muli o ka hoʻokohu a ke kuhina nui i hope nona. | That night the ten men chosen by the chief went up to destroy the sisters of Aiwohikupua, and the assistant counsellor made the eleventh in place of the chief counsellor. |
| Ch.16 p.83 para.3 sent.1 | Ma ka pili o ka wanaʻao, hiki lākou i kahi e kokoke iki aku ana i Paliuli. | At the first dawn they approached Paliuli. |
| Ch.16 p.83 para.3 sent.5 | ʻAʻole naʻe lākou i liʻuliʻu aku, he ʻike ʻana kā lākou i ka ʻūpoʻi ʻana iho a ke a luna o ua moʻo nei ma luna pono iho o lākou nei; aia naʻe lākou nei | soon they saw the upper jaw of the lizard hanging right over them; they were just between the lizard's jaws; |
| Ch.16 p.83 para.4 sent.2 | A no kēia mea, wae hou aʻela ke aliʻi he mau kānaka he iwakālua e piʻi e luku i nā kaikuahine, ma ka poʻe ikaika wale nō, a hoʻokohu akula ke kuhina i hope kuhina nona e hele pū me nā koa. | So the chief again chose a party of warriors, twenty of them, from the strongest of his men, to go up and destroy the sisters; and the counsellor appointed an assistant counsellor to go for him with the men. |
| Ch.16 p.84 para.2 sent.4 | Ma ke kauoha a ke aliʻi, lawe aʻela ke kuhina iā ʻUlili a me ʻAkikeʻehiʻale, ko ʻAiwohikupua mau ʻalele māmā, a piʻi akula e ʻike i ka pono o kona mau kānaka. | At the chief's command the counsellor sent the Snipe and the Turnstone, Aiwohikupua's swiftest messengers, to go up and find out the truth about his men. |
| Ch.16 p.84 para.3 sent.1 | I ua mau ʻelele lā i hala aku ai, ʻaʻole i liʻuliʻu, hālāwai maila me lāua kekahi kanaka kia manu mai uka mai o ʻOlaʻa, nīnau maila, “Ma hea kā ʻolua hele?” | Not long after they had left they met another man, a bird catcher from the uplands of Olaa; he asked. "Where are you two going?" |
| Ch.16 p.84 para.5 sent.3 | ʻAʻole i ʻupuʻupu, lohe akula lāua i ka hū a ka makani a me ke kamumu o nā lāʻau e hina ana ma ʻō a ma ʻō, a laila, hoʻomanaʻo lāua i ka ʻōlelo a ke kia manu, “Inā e hū ana ka makani, ʻo ua moʻo lā ia.” | not long after they heard the sighing of the wind and the humming of the trees bending back and forth; then they remembered the bird catcher's words, "If the wind hums, that is from the lizard." |
| Ch.16 p.84 para.6 sent.1 | Maopopo ihola iā lāua ʻo ua moʻo nei kēia, e lele aʻe ana lāua ma ko lāua kino manu. | They knew then this must be the lizard; they flew in their bird bodies. |
| Ch.16 p.84 para.6 sent.2 | I ia lele ʻana a kiʻekiʻe lāua nei, i ʻalawa aʻe ka hana, aia ma luna pono o lāua ke a luna e poʻi iho ana iā lāua nei, a no ko lāua nei māmā loa o ka lele ʻana ma ko lāua ʻano kino manu, ua pakele lāua. | They flew high and looked about. There right above them was the upper jaw shutting down upon them, and only by quickness of flight in their bird bodies did they escape. |
| Ch.17 p.85 para.3 sent.1 | Ma mua o ko ka ʻīlio piʻi ʻana e luku i nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua, kauoha mua ua ʻīlio nei i ke aliʻi a me nā kaukaualiʻi a me nā kānaka a pau, a penei kāna ʻōlelo kauoha, “ʻAuhea ʻoukou. | Before the dog went up to destroy Aiwohikupua's sisters the dog first instructed the chief, and the chiefs under him, and all the men, as follows: "Where are you? |
| Ch.17 p.85 para.3 sent.2 | Ma kēia piʻi ʻana aʻu, e nānā ʻoukou i kēia lā i uka. | While I am away, you watch the uplands. |
| Ch.17 p.85 para.3 sent.3 | Inā e piʻi ka ʻohu a kū pololei i luna a kiʻekiʻe loa, inā e hina ka ʻohu ma ka lulu, a laila, ua hālāwai wau me Kihanuilūlūmoku, manaʻo aʻe ʻoukou ua hoʻāikāne māua. | When the clouds rise straight up, if they turn leeward then I have met Kihanuilulumoku and you will know that we have made friends. |
| Ch.17 p.87 para.2 sent.1 | I ka ʻīlio i hiki aku ai i uka ma kahi kokoke i Paliuli, ua hiamoe naʻe ʻo Kihanuilūlūmoku i ia manawa. | When the dog had come close to Paliuli, Kihanuilulumoku was asleep at the time; |
| Ch.17 p.87 para.4 sent.2 | I ia manawa, ua lanakila ka moʻo ma luna o Kalāhūmoku a hoʻi akula ka ʻīlio me ke ola māhunehune. | then the lizard was victor over Kalahumoku and the dog just escaped |
| Ch.17 p.87 para.5 sent.2 | A lohe akula lākou iā ʻUlili mā i kēia kaua a ka moʻo me ka ʻīlio, a he mea mau naʻe iā ʻAiwohikupua ma ka nānā iā uka. | When they heard from Snipe and his companion of this battle between the lizard and the dog, Aiwohikupua looked toward the mountain. |
| Ch.17 p.87 para.6 sent.1 | Ma ke ahiahi o ua lā hoʻouka kaua nei o nā kupuʻeu, hoʻi mai ana ʻo Kalāhūmoku me ka nāwaliwali; ua pau ke aho. | In the evening of the day of the fight between the two marvelous creatures Kalahumoku came limping back exhausted; |
| Ch.17 p.87 para.6 sent.3 | Hoʻi akula lākou a hiki i Kauaʻi, a haʻi akula i ke ʻano o kāna hele ʻana a me ka lanakila o ka moʻo ma luna o lākou. | They departed and came to Kauai and told the story of the journey and of the victory of the lizard over them. |
| Ch.17 p.87 para.7 sent.1 | Ma kēia hoʻi ʻana o ʻAiwohikupua i Kauaʻi mai ke kiʻi hope ʻana iā Lāʻieikawai, a laila, hoʻopau loa ʻo ʻAiwohikupua i kona manaʻo ʻana no Lāʻieikawai. | Having returned to Kauai without Laieikawai, Aiwohikupua gave up thinking about Laieikawai |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.1 sent.1 | A loaʻa kona hoʻomaikaʻi ʻia i mua o kona akua me ke kala ʻia o kona hala hoʻohiki, “ʻAʻole e lawe i kekahi o nā wāhine o kēia mau mokupuni i wahine hoʻāo,” e like me nā mea i hōʻike | And he obtained favor in the presence of his god, and was released from his sinful vow "not to take any woman of these islands to wife," as has been shown in the former chapters of this story. After the ceremonies at Kauai, he sent his messengers, the Snipe
and the Turnstone, to go and announce before Poliahu the demands
of the chief. |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.2 sent.1 | Ma ko lāua ʻano kino manu, ua lele koke lāua a hiki iā Hinaikamalama lā ma Hāna. | In their bird bodies they flew swiftly to Hinaikamalama's home at Hana |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.4 sent.2 | ʻŌlelo akula nā ʻelele i ke aliʻi wahine, “I hoʻouna ʻia mai nei māua e haʻi aku iā ʻoe ma ke kauoha a ko kāne hoʻopalau ʻekolu malama ou e hoʻomākaukau ai no ka hoʻāo o ʻolua, a ma ka hā o ka malama, i ka pō i o Kulu e hiki mai ai ʻo ia a hālāwai ʻolua e like me kā ʻolua hoʻohiki ʻana.” | The messengers said to the princess, "We have been sent hither to tell you the command of your betrothed husband. You have three months to prepare for the marriage, and in February, on the night of the seventeenth, the night of Kulu, he will come to meet you, according to the oath between you." |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.9 sent.2 | Lele hou aku nō a he wahi mokuʻāina lōʻihi, ma laila aku māua, a he mokuʻāina nui e like ka moku i loaʻa mua iā māua. | flew on to some long islands — a large island like the one we first passed, |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.9 sent.4 | Lele akula māua ma ka ʻaoʻao hikina o ua moku lā. | we flew along the east coast of that island |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.11 sent.1 | Akā, ma kēia hana a nā ʻelele lalau, ua hoʻā ʻia ka inaina o ke aliʻi no kāna mau ʻelele, no laila, ua hoʻopau ʻia ko lāua punahele. | Now for this mistake of the messengers the rage of Aiwohikupua was stirred against his messengers, and they ceased to be among his favorites. |
| Ch.17 p.88 para.11 sent.2 | Ma kēia hoʻopau ʻia ʻana o ua ʻo ʻUlili mā, manaʻo ihola lāua, e haʻi i nā mea huna i pāpā ʻia iā lāua e ko lāua haku, no laila, ua hoʻokō lāua i kā lāua mea i ʻōhumu ai. | At this, Snipe and his companion decided to tell the secrets prohibited to the two by their master. Now how they carried out their intrigue, |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.1 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ka hoʻopau ʻia ʻana o ʻUlili ma, hoʻouna hou akula ʻo ia ia Koaʻe, kekahi o kana mau ʻelele mama, e like me ka ʻōlelo kauoha i na ʻelele mua. | After the dismissal of Snipe and his fellow, the chief dispatched Frigate-bird, one of his nimble messengers, with the same errand as before. |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.1 sent.2 | A hiki ʻo Koaʻe i o Poliʻahu la, hālāwai akula lāua, haʻi akula ʻo Koaʻe i ke kauoha a ke aliʻi e like me ka mea i haʻi ʻia ma na paukū hope o ka mokuna ʻumikumamahiku o kēia kaʻao. | Frigate-bird went to Poliahu; when they met. Frigate-bird gave the chief's command, according to the words spoken in Chapter XVII of this story. |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.1 sent.3 | A pau na ʻōlelo a ke aliʻi i ka haʻi ʻia, hoʻi akula ko ke aliʻi ʻelele a haʻi akula ma ka pololei, a laila, he mea maikaʻi ia i kona haku. | Having given his message, the messenger returned and reported aright; then his lord was pleased. |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.2 sent.1 | Noho ihola ʻo ʻAiwohikupua a i na la hope o ke kolu o ka malama, lawe aʻela ke aliʻi i kona mau kaukaualiʻi a me na punahele, i na haia wahine hoʻi, na hoa kūpono ke hele pū ma ke kahiko ʻana i ka hanohano aliʻi ke hele ma kana huakaʻi no ka hoʻāo o na aliʻi. | Aiwohikupua waited until the end of the third month; the chief took his underchiefs and his favorites and the women of his household and other companions suitable to go with their renowned lord in all his royal splendor on an expedition for the marriage of chiefs. |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.3 sent.1 | Ma mua o ka pō hoʻāo o na aliʻi, i ka pō i o Huna, hiki lākou i Kawaihae. | Some nights before that set for the marriage, the eleventh night of the month, the night of Huna, they came to Kawaihae; |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.4 sent.1 | A hiki ka ʻelele i mua o ʻAiwohikupua ma ke kiʻi ʻana ia Poliʻahu, a haʻi maila i kana ʻōlelo maiā Poliʻahu mai, “Eia ke kauoha a ko wahine. | When the messenger returned from Poliahu, he told Poliahu's reply: "Your wife commands that |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.4 sent.2 | Ma Waiʻulaʻula ʻolua e hoʻāo ai. | the marriage take place at Waiulaula. |
| Ch.18 p.89 para.4 sent.3 | Inā e ʻike aku kakou ma ke kakahiaka nui o ka la ʻo Kūlua e haliʻi ana ka hau mai ka piko o Mauna Kea, Mauna Loa a me Hualālai a hiki i Waiʻulaʻula, a laila, ua hiki lākou i kahi o ʻolua e hoʻāo ai, a laila, hele aku kākou. | When you look out early in the morning of the seventeenth, the day of Kulu, and the snow clothes the summit of Maunakea, Maunaloa, and Hualalai, clear to Waiulaula, then they have reached the place where you are to wed; then set out, so she says." |
| Ch.18 p.90 para.2 sent.1 | Ma nā waʻa o ke aliʻi i kau ai a holo aku, ua kūkulu ʻia ma luna o nā pola o nā waʻa he ʻanuʻu, he wahi e noho ai ke aliʻi. | On the high seat of the double canoe in which the chief sailed |
| Ch.18 p.90 para.2 sent.2 | Ua haku ʻia ka ʻanuʻu o ke aliʻi i nā ʻahuʻula, a ma luna pono o ka ʻanuʻu, he mau pūloʻuloʻu kapu aliʻi, a ma loko o ka pūloʻuloʻu, noho ihola ʻo ʻAiwohikupua. | was set up a canopied couch covered with feather capes, and right above the couch the taboo signs of a chief, and below the sacred symbols sat Aiwohikupua. |
| Ch.18 p.90 para.3 sent.1 | Ma nā waʻa ukali o ke aliʻi, he ʻumi kaulua e hoʻopuni ana i ko ke aliʻi waʻa, a ma luna o nā waʻa ukali o ke aliʻi, he poʻe akamai i ke kāʻeke. | Following the chief and surrounding his canoe came ten double canoes filled with expert dancers. |
| Ch.18 p.90 para.4 sent.1 | Ma ka lā ʻo Kulu ma ke kakahiaka i ka puka ʻana aʻe o ka lā a kiʻekiʻe iki aʻe, ʻike akula ʻo ʻAiwohikupua mā i ka hoʻomaka ʻana o ka hau e uhi ma luna o ka piko o nā mauna a hiki i kahi o lāua e hoʻāo ai. | On the seventeenth day, the day of Kulu, in the early morning, a little later than sunrise, Aiwohikupua and his party saw the, snow begin to hide the summits of the mountain clear to the place of meeting. |
| Ch.18 p.90 para.5 sent.2 | E like me ka mea i ʻōlelo ʻia ma luna, pēlā ko ke aliʻi hele ʻana. | He went in the state described above. |
| Ch.18 p.90 para.7 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua mā i hiki aku ai ma ko Poliʻahu mā wahi e noho ana, he mea leʻaleʻa loa i ke aliʻi wahine nā mea kani o nā waʻa o ke aliʻi kāne, a he mea mahalo loa nō hoʻi iā lākou ka ʻike ʻana i ko ke aliʻi kāne hanohano a maikaʻi hoʻi. | When Aiwohikupua and his party reached Poliahu's party the princess was more than delighted with the music from the dancers accompanying the chief's canoe and .she praised his splendid appearance; it was beautiful. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.1 sent.2 | Hoʻi aʻela lākou a noho ma Kauaʻi i uka o Honopūwai. | and they returned and lived in Kauai, in the uplands of Honopuwai. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.2 sent.4 | A mākaukau ko ke aliʻi mau pono no ka hele ʻana, kau akula ʻo Hinaikamalama ma nā waʻa a holo akula a hiki i Kauaʻi. | When all was ready Hinaikamalama went on board the double canoe and sailed and came to Kauai. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.3 sent.1 | Iā ia nei i hiki aku ai, aia ʻo ʻAiwohikupua me Poliʻahu ma Mānā. | When she arrived Aiwohikupua was with Poliahu and others at Mana, |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.3 sent.2 | E ʻākoakoa ana nā aliʻi ma laila no ka lā hoʻokahakaha o Hauaʻiliki me Makaweli. | where all the chiefs were gathered for the sport between Hauailiki and Makaweli. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.4 sent.2 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua mā e leʻaleʻa ana i ia manawa ma ka waenakonu o ka pō, hiki akula ʻo Hinaikamalama a noho i loko o ka ʻaha leʻaleʻa, a he mea malihini naʻe i ka ʻaha kēia kaikamahine malihini. | During the rejoicings in the middle of the night came Hinaikamalama and sat in the midst of the festive gathering, and all marveled at this strange girl. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.5 sent.5 | Ma ke kauoha a ka mea nona ka pō leʻaleʻa e kilu, ua hoʻopau ʻia ke kāʻeke. | At the request of the one for whom the sports were given the dance was ended. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.6 sent.3 | I ia manawa, kāʻili maila ka mea ʻume i ka maile a kau akula ma luna o Hinaikamalama a kū maila. | Then the master of ceremonies took the wand back and touched Hinaikamalama's head and she arose. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.8 sent.4 | No laila, i hele mai nei wau e ʻike i ko ia ala hoʻopunipuni nui iaʻu, no ka mea, hiki aʻe kēlā i Hāna ma Maui, e heʻe nalu ana mākou. | therefore I came here to see how he had lied to me. For that man there came to Hana on Maui while we were surf riding. |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.8 sent.10 | Inā e make wau iā ia ala ma ke kōnane ʻana, a laila, lilo wau na ia ala. | if he beat me at konane, then I would become his |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.8 sent.11 | Ma kāna mau hana a pau e ʻōlelo ai iaʻu, ma laila wau, ma nā mea kūpono naʻe, a pēlā nō hoʻi wau inā e make kēlā iaʻu. | and do everything that he told me to do, |
| Ch.18 p.91 para.8 sent.13 | I ke kōnane ʻana naʻe, ʻaʻole i liʻuliʻu, paʻa mua iaʻu ma luna o ka papa kōnane a māua, ʻo ko ia ala make ihola nō ia. | And in the game in a little while my piece blocked the game, and he was beaten. |
| Ch.18 p.92 para.2 sent.1 | Ma hope iho naʻe o ka haʻiʻōlelo ʻana a Hinaikamalama, hoʻomaka hou ke kilu; iā ʻAiwohikupua lāua me Makaweli ke kilu i ia manawa. | Soon after Hinaikamalama's speech the games began again; the game was between Aiwohikupua and Makaweli. |
| Ch.18 p.92 para.2 sent.2 | I ia manawa, kū hou maila ka mea ʻume a hoʻoili hou i ka maile ma luna o Hauaʻiliki me Hinaikamalama, a kū aʻela ʻo Hauaʻiliki, a kū maila nō hoʻi ʻo Hinaikamalama. | Then the master of ceremonies stood up and touched Hauailiki
and Hinaikamalama with the wand, and Hauailiki arose and Hinaikamalama also. |
| Ch.18 p.92 para.2 sent.3 | Ma kēia ʻume hope, haʻi maila ʻo Hinaikamalama i kāna ʻōlelo i mua o Hauaʻiliki, “E ke Aliʻi ē, ua hoʻohui ʻia kāua e ka mea ʻume ma ka mea mau o nā ʻaha leʻaleʻa. | This time Hinaikamalama said to Hauailiki, "O chief, we have been matched by the sport master as is usual in this game. |
| Ch.18 p.92 para.2 sent.5 | Aia a ʻae mai ʻo ʻAiwohikupua e hoʻokō māua i nā hoʻohiki a māua a pau ko māua manawa, a laila, ma ka pō leʻaleʻa hou a ke aliʻi e hoʻokō ʻia ai ka ʻume o kēia pō no kāua,” a laila, he mea maikaʻi loa ia i ko Hauaʻiliki manaʻo, a no kēia ʻōlelo a Hinaikamalama, lawe aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua iā Hinaikamalama no ka hoʻokō i kā lāua hoʻohiki. | when Aiwohikupua has consented to carry out our vow. after that, at the chief's next festival night, this night's match shall be fulfilled." Then Hauailiki was very well pleased. And because of Hinaikamalama's words, Aiwohikupua took Hinaikamalama to carry out their vow. |
| Ch.18 p.93 para.1 sent.1 | I ia pō nō, i loko o ko lāua manawa hoʻomaha no ka hōʻoluʻolu i ka hoʻohiki ʻana, hiki maila ma o Hinaikamalama ke anu māʻeʻele loa, no ka mea, ua kuʻu maila ʻo Poliʻahu i ke anu o kona kapa hau ma luna o kona ʻenemi. | That very night as they rested comfortably in the fulfillment of their bargain, Hinaikamalama grew numb with cold, for Poliahu had spread her cold snow mantle over her enemy. |
| Ch.19 p.95 para.2 sent.1 | A hoʻomākaukau ihola lāua e hōʻoluʻolu no ka hoʻokō i kā lāua hoʻohiki ma ka hoʻopalau ʻana, a laila, hiki hou maila ke anu iā Hinaikamalama, ʻo ka lua ia o kona loaʻa i ke anu. | As they began to take their ease in fulfillment of their vow at the betrothal, then the cold came a second time upon Hinaikamalama. |
| Ch.19 p.95 para.3 sent.3 | Ke anu mai nei ma nā kapuaʻi, | The cold lies at the soles of my feet. |
| Ch.19 p.96 para.2 sent.4 | ʻApōpō, ma ke awakea, a laila, ʻo ia ka hoʻokō ʻana o ka hoʻohiki a kāua.” | to-morrow at noon, then we will carry out the vow." |
| Ch.19 p.96 para.4 sent.1 | Ma ke awakea, lawe hou aʻela ʻo ʻAiwohikupua e hoʻokō i kā lāua mea i ʻōlelo ai i ia pō iho ma mua. | At noon Aiwohikupua again took her in fulfillment of the agreement of the night before. |
| Ch.19 p.96 para.5 sent.2 | I ia manawa ka hoʻokuʻu ʻana aku o Poliʻahu i ka wela ma luna o Hinaikamalama. | this time it was the heat Poliahu sent to Hinaikamalama. T |
| Ch.19 p.96 para.8 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula ʻo Hinaikamalama, “E hoʻomanawanui hou kāua, a inā i hiki hou mai ka wela ma luna o kāua, a laila, haʻalele mai ʻoe iaʻu.” | Said Hinaikamalama, "Let us still have patience and if the heat comes over us again, then leave me." |
| Ch.19 p.96 para.9 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o kēia mau mea, hoʻāʻo hou aʻela lāua i kā lāua hana no ka hoʻokō i kā lāua hoʻohiki. | After this, they again met in fulfillment of their vow. |
| Ch.19 p.96 para.9 sent.2 | I ia manawa, kau hou maila nō ka wela ma luna o lāua, a laila, hāpai hou aʻela ʻo ia ma ke mele: | Then again the heat settled over them, then she raised again the chant: |
| Ch.19 p.97 para.3 sent.1 | (E waiho kākou i ke kamaʻilio ʻana no ʻAiwohikupua ma ʻaneʻi. | (Let us leave off here telling about Aiwohikupua. |
| Ch.19 p.97 para.3 sent.3 | Ma hope iho o kona hoʻokaʻawale ʻana iā ʻAiwohikupua, hele aku ʻo ia a noho ma ka hale kamaʻāina. | After leaving Aiwohikupua, she came and stayed at the house of a native of the place. |
| Ch.19 p.97 para.3 sent.4 | I ia pō iho, he pō leʻaleʻa hou ia no Hauaʻiliki me nā aliʻi ma Puʻuopāpaʻi. | This very night there was again a festivity for Hauailiki and the chiefs at Puuopapai. |
| Ch.19 p.97 para.3 sent.5 | I ia pō, hoʻomanaʻo aʻela ʻo Hinaikamalama no kāna kauoha iā Hauaʻiliki ma hope iho o ko lāua ʻume ʻia ʻana, a ma mua hoʻi o kona hoʻohui ʻana me ʻAiwohikupua. | This night Hinaikamalama remembered her promise to Hauailiki after the game of spin-the-gourd, before she met Aiwohikupua. |
| Ch.19 p.97 para.4 sent.3 | Ma hope iho, na Kaʻiliokalauokekoa me Makaweli ka lua o ka leʻaleʻa. | Afterward Kailiokalauokekoa and Makaweli had the second game. |
| Ch.19 p.97 para.8 sent.1 | A ʻike maila ʻo Poliʻahu iā Hinaikamalama, kokoe akula nā maka i ka ʻike i kona ʻenemi, a hala akula ʻo Hauaʻiliki me Hinaikamalama ma kahi kūpono iā lāua e hoʻoluʻolu ai. | When Poliahu saw Hinaikamalama, she frowned at sight of her rival. And Hauailiki and Hinaikamalama withdrew where they could take their pleasure. |
| Ch.19 p.98 para.1 sent.2 | Ua like nō kou manaʻo me koʻu, akā, e hoʻohui mua kāua iā kāua iho e like me ka makemake o ka mea ʻume, a ma hope loa aku, a laila, hoʻāo loa kāua.” | you think as I do; hut let us first meet according to the choice of the sport master, then afterwards we will marry." |
| Ch.19 p.98 para.4 sent.3 | I ia manawa, popoʻi maila ke anu i ka ʻaha leʻaleʻa a puni ka pāpaʻi kilu, a kau maila ma luna o ka ʻaha ka pilikia a hiki i ka wanaʻao, haʻalele ʻo Poliʻahu mā iā Kauaʻi. | at the same time cold penetrated the whole kilu shelter and lasted until morning, when Poliahu and her companions left Kauai. |
| Ch.19 p.98 para.5 sent.1 | (Aia a hiki aku i ka hiki ʻana aku o Lāʻieikawai i Kauaʻi, ma hope iho o ko Kekalukaluokēwā hoʻāo ʻana aku me Lāʻieikawai, a laila, e hoʻomaka hou ke kamaʻilio no Hinaikamalama. | (When we get to Laieikawai's coming to Kauai after Kekalukaluokewa's marriage with Laieikawai, then we will begin again the story of Hinaikamalama; |
| Ch.19 p.98 para.5 sent.2 | Ma kēia wahi e kamaʻilio no ke kauoha a Kauakahialiʻi i kāna aikāne, pēlā aku a hiki i ka hui ʻana me Lāʻieikawai.) | at this place let us tell of Kauakahialii's command to his friend, and so on until he meets Laieikawai.) |
| Ch.19 p.98 para.6 sent.1 | Iā Kauakahialiʻi me Kaʻiliokalauokekoa ma Pihanakalani ma hope iho o ko lāua hoʻi ʻana mai Hawaiʻi mai, ʻoiai ua kokoke mai ko lāua mau lā hope, i ia manawa, kauoha aʻela ʻo Kauakahialiʻi i kāna aikāne, iā Kekalukaluokēwā, i kāna ʻōlelo hoʻopōmaikaʻi ma luna ona, a eia nō ia, “E kuʻu aikāne aloha nui, ke waiho aku nei wau i ʻōlelo hoʻopōmaikaʻi ma luna ou, no ka mea, ke kokoke mai nei koʻu mau lā hope, a hoʻi aku i ka ʻaoʻao mau o ka honua. | After their return from Hawaii, Kauakahialii lived with Kailiokalauokekoa at Pihanakalani. Now the end of their days was near. Then Kauakahialii laid a blessing upon his friend, Kekalukaluokewa, and this it was: "Ah! my friend, greatly beloved, I give you my blessing, for the end of my days is near, and I am going back to the other side of the earth. |
| Ch.19 p.98 para.7 sent.3 | ʻO ʻoe nō ma luna, ʻo ka wahine a kāua ma lalo, e like nō me kā kāua naʻi ʻana i ka moku i puni ai, pēlā nō ʻoe e noho aku ai me ka wahine a kāua. | you above, and our wife below; as we two ruled over the island, so will you and our wife do. |
| Ch.19 p.99 para.2 sent.5 | Ma kēia kauoha a Kauakahialiʻi, ua pono ia i ko ke aikāne manaʻo. | Kauakahialii's charge pleased his friend. |
| Ch.19 p.99 para.2 sent.6 | Ma ia hope mai, make akula ʻo Kauakahialiʻi, lilo ka noho aliʻi i kāna aikāne, a ʻo kā lāua wahine nō ke kuhina. | In the end Kauakahialii died; the chief, his friend, took the rule, and their wife was the counsellor. |
| Ch.19 p.99 para.3 sent.1 | A ma ia hope mai, i ke kokoke ʻana i ko Kaʻiliokalauokekoa mau lā hope, waiho akula ʻo ia i ʻōlelo kauoha no ka mālama ʻana iā Kanikawī, kā lāua ʻohe kapu me kāna kāne e like me ke kauoha a Kauakahialiʻi, “E kuʻu kāne, eia ka ʻohe. | Afterwards, when Kailiokalauokekoa's last days drew near, she prayed her husband to guard Kanikawi, their sacred flute, according to Kauakahialii's command: "My husband, here is the flute; |
| Ch.19 p.99 para.3 sent.5 | Ma kāu wahi e hele ai, a e noho ai, mai haʻalele iki i ka ʻohe, no ka mea, ua ʻike nō ʻoe i ka hana a kāu aikāne i ko ʻolua manawa i hiʻi aʻe ai iaʻu i kuʻu wā e ʻaneʻane aku ana i ka make ma muli o kuʻu aloha i ko aikāne. | wherever you go to dwell, never leave the flute at all, for you well know what your friend did when you two came to get me when I was almost dead for love of your friend. |
| Ch.20 p.101 para.1 sent.2 | Ma hope iho o ka pau ʻana o kāna hoʻoponopono ʻana i ka ʻāina a me kona noho aliʻi ʻana, i ia manawa, hoʻomanaʻo aʻela ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā i ke kauoha a kāna aikāne no Lāʻieikawai. | After apportioning the land and setting up his court, Kekalukaluokewa bethought him of his friend's charge concerning Laieikawai. |
| Ch.20 p.101 para.3 sent.2 | Ua nui nā lā i hala iā lākou ma ia hele ʻana. | Many days passed on the voyage. |
| Ch.20 p.101 para.4 sent.1 | Ma kēia holo ʻana a lākou, hiki akula ma Makahanaloa i Hilo ma ke kakahiaka nui. | As they sailed, they arrived in the early morning at Makahanaloa in Hilo. |
| Ch.20 p.101 para.4 sent.3 | ʻO ia nō ua wahi lā, ma laila nō kahi i loaʻa ai iaʻu.” | where I found her." |
| Ch.20 p.101 para.4 sent.4 | E neʻe ana naʻe ka ua o Hilo i ia mau lā a lākou i hiki aku ai ma Makahanaloa. | Now the rain was sweeping Hilo at the time when they came to Makahanaloa. |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.1 sent.3 | Ua like ko ke aliʻi manaʻo ʻana ma kēia mea me ko ʻAiwohikupua, a no kēia mea, noho ihola lākou ma laila e like me ko ke aliʻi makemake. | The chief's proposal was the same as Aiwohikupua's. So they remained there as the chief desired. |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.1 sent.6 | Ma ke kiʻekiʻe iki ʻana aʻe o ka lā, aia e piʻo ana ke ānuenue i kai o Keaʻau. | a little later in the day the rainbow was at the seacoast of Keaau; |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.1 sent.8 | (E like me kā kākou kamaʻilio ʻana ma mua ma ko ʻAiwohikupua moʻolelo.) | (as in the narrative before of Aiwohikupua's story). |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.2 sent.1 | Ma kēlā lā, pau ko ke aliʻi kānalua ʻana nō kēlā hōʻailona, a holo akula a hiki i Keaʻau. | That day there was no longer any doubt of the sign, and they sailed and came to Keaau. |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.2 sent.2 | Iā lākou i hiki aku ai ma Keaʻau, ua hoʻi aku ʻo Lāʻieikawai i uka o Paliuli. | When they arrived, Laieikawai had gone up to Paliuli. |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.4 sent.7 | Ma ke kakahiaka nui o ka hā o ko Lāʻieikawai mau lā hoʻomalu, ala aʻela ʻo ia a me kona kahu kuapuʻu, a iho akula i Keaʻau. | In the early morning of the fourth day of retirement, she arose and went down with her hunchbacked attendant to Keaau. |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.5 sent.1 | Iā lāua i hiki aku ai ma kahi kokoke iki e nānā aku ai i kauhale, aia hoʻi, ua hiki mua aku ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā ma kūlana heʻe nalu ma mua o ko lāua hiki ʻana aku. | When she arrived close to the village, lo! Kekalukaluokewa was already out surf riding; |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.5 sent.2 | ʻEkolu naʻe mau keiki e kū ana ma kūlana heʻe nalu ʻo ke aliʻi a me nā punahele ʻelua. | three youths rose in the surf, the chief and his favorites. |
| Ch.20 p.102 para.6 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai mā e noho ana ma kahi a lāua e hoʻohālua ana no Kekalukaluokēwā, ʻaʻole naʻe lāua i ʻike i ke kāne a ke kupuna wahine i makemake ai. | As Laieikawai and her companion spied out for Kekalukahiokewa, they did not know which man the grandmother wanted. |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.1 sent.3 | Ma ka ʻōlelo a ko Lāʻieikawai kahu, noho ihola lāua ma laila e kali ana. | [At the words of Laieikawai's attendant,] So they sat and waited. |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.5 sent.1 | ʻĪ mai ʻo Waka, “ʻApōpō, ma ka puka ʻana o ka lā, ʻo ia ka wā e ʻau ai ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā i ka heʻe nalu, ʻo ia wale. | Said Waka, "To-morrow at daybreak Kekalukaluokewa goes surfing alone; |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.5 sent.2 | I ia manawa e hoʻouhi aku ai wau i ka noe ma luna o ka ʻāina a puni ʻo Puna nei, a ma loko o ia noe, e hoʻouna aku nō wau iā ʻoe ma luna o nā manu a hui ʻolua me Kekalukaluokēwā me ka ʻike ʻole ʻia. | at that time I will cover all the land of Puna with a mist, and in this mist I will send you on the wings of birds to meet Kekalukaluokewa without your being seen. |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.5 sent.3 | Aia a pau ka uhi ʻana o ka noe ma luna o ka ʻāina, i ia manawa e ʻike aku ai nā mea a pau, ʻo ʻoe kekahi me Kekalukaluokēwā e heʻe mai ana i ka nalu hoʻokahi, ʻo ia ka manawa e loaʻa ai ko ihu i ke keiki Kauaʻi. | When the mist clears, then all shall see you riding on the wave with Kekalukaluokewa; that is the time to give a kiss to the Kauai youth. |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.5 sent.6 | Aia a pau kā ʻolua heʻe nalu ʻana, a laila, e hoʻouna aku wau i nā manu a me ka noe ma luna o ka ʻāina, ʻo kou manawa ia e hoʻi mai ai me ko kāne a loko o ko ʻolua hale, a laila, e hoʻolaʻa ʻia ko kino e like me koʻu makemake. | After the surf riding, then I will send the birds and a mist over the land; that is the time for you to return with your husband to your house, become one flesh according to jour wish.'' |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.5 sent.7 | A pau kēia mau mea i ka haʻi ʻia iā Lāʻieikawai, hoʻi akula ʻo ia ma kona hale aliʻi, ʻo ia a me kona kahu. | When all this had been told Laieikawai, she returned to the chief-house with her nurse. |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.6 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai me kona kahu ma ka hale ma hope iho o ke kauoha ʻana a kona kupuna wahine, hoʻouna aʻela ʻo ia i kona kahu e kiʻi aku iā Mailehaʻiwale, Mailekaluhea, Mailelauliʻi, Mailepākaha a me Kahalaomāpuana, kona mau hoa kūkā e like me kā lākou hoʻohiki ʻana. | Afterward, when they were in the house, she sent her nurse to bring Mailehaiwale, Mailekaluhea, Mailelaulii, Mailepakaha, and Kahalaomapuana, her counsellors, as they had agreed. |
| Ch.20 p.103 para.6 sent.3 | Ua kūkā aʻe nei au me ke kupuna wahine o kākou, e hoʻāo wau i kāne naʻu, no laila wau i hoʻouna aku nei i ko kākou kahu e kiʻi aku iā ʻoukou e like me kā kākou hoʻohiki ʻana ma hope iho o ko kākou hui ʻana ma ʻaneʻi. | I have taken counsel with our grandmother about my marriage, so I sent my nurse to bring you, as we agreed when we met here. |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.1 sent.4 | Ma kāu wahi e hele ai, ma laila pū kākou. | where you go, let us go with you; |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.2 sent.2 | Eia hoʻi, ua ʻike mua aʻe nei kākou ma nā mokuna mua, he mea mau nō iā Lāʻieikawai ka iho i kai o Keaʻau ma ka moʻolelo o Hauaʻiliki a me ka moʻolelo o ka hele ʻalua ʻana o ʻAiwohikupua i Hawaiʻi, a ʻo ia mau nō a hiki i ko Kekalukaluokēwā hiki ʻana i Hawaiʻi. | Now we have seen in former chapters, in the story of Hauailiki and the story of Aiwohikupua's second trip to Hawaii, that it was customary for Laieikawai to go down to Keaau, and it was the same when Kekalukaluokewa came to Hawaii. |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.3 sent.1 | I nā manawa a pau o ko Lāʻieikawai hele ʻana ma Keaʻau, he mea mau i kēia keiki, iā Halaaniani, ka ʻike iā Lāʻieikawai ma Keaʻau. | Every time Laieikawai came to Keaau the youth Halaaniani saw her |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.3 sent.4 | A, ʻo ua Halaaniani nei, ke kaikunāne o Maliʻo, he keiki kaulana ia ma Puna no ke kanaka uʻi; he keiki koaka naʻe. | As to this Halaaniani, he was Malio's brother, a youth famous throughout Puna for his good looks, but a profligate fellow. |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.4 sent.1 | I ka ʻehā o nā lā hoʻomalu o Lāʻieikawai, he mea hoʻohuoi iā Halaaniani ka nalo ʻana o Lāʻieikawai, ʻaʻole i hiki hou ma Keaʻau. | During the four days of Laieikawai's retirement Halaaniani brooded jealously over her absence. She came no more to Keaau. |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.4 sent.2 | Iā Halaaniani i hoʻokokoke mai ai ma kahi o nā kamaʻāina o Keaʻau, lohe ihola ʻo ia, e lilo ana ua Lāʻieikawai nei iā Kekalukaluokēwā. | In the village he heard that Laieikawai was to be Kekalukaluokewa's. |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.5 sent.2 | ʻŌlelo akula kona kaikunāne, “E Maliʻo, i piʻi mai nei wau iā ʻoe e kiʻi ʻoe i koʻu makemake, no ka mea, i nā lā a pau aʻu e nalo nei, ma Keaʻau nō wau no koʻu ʻike mau i kēia wahine maikaʻi. | Said her brother, " Malio, I have come to you to gain my desire. All those days I was absent I was at Keaau to behold a certain beautiful woman, |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.5 sent.4 | A ma kēia lā, ua lohe aku nei wau e lilo ana i ke aliʻi o Kauaʻi i ka lā ʻapōpō. | To-day I heard that to-morrow she is to be the chief of Kauai; |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.5 sent.5 | No laila, ʻo ko mana a pau, ma luna iho ia o kāua like e lilo iaʻu kēlā kaikamahine.” | therefore let us exert all our arts over her to win her to me." |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.6 sent.4 | No laila, a e like me kou makemake, e hoʻi naʻe ʻoe a kou wahi, a ma ke ahiahi pōʻeleʻele, piʻi hou mai, a ma uka nei kāua e moe ai. | Therefore, as you desire, go home, and in the dark of evening return, and we will sleep here on the mountain; |
| Ch.20 p.104 para.7 sent.1 | Ma muli o ke kauoha o Maliʻo i kona kaikunāne, hoʻi maila ʻo Halaaniani a ma kona hale noho ma kula a hiki i ka manawa i kauoha ʻia nona e hele aku i kahi o kona kaikuahine. | According to Malio's directions to her brother, Halaaniani returned to his house at Kula. He came at the time his sister had commanded. |
| Ch.20 p.105 para.1 sent.1 | Ma mua o ko lāua manawa hiamoe, ʻōlelo akula ʻo Maliʻo iā Halaaniani, “Inā e moe kāua i kēia pō, a i loaʻa iā ʻoe ka moeʻuhane, a laila, haʻi mai ʻoe iaʻu, a pēlā nō hoʻi wau.” | Before they slept, Malio said to Halaaniani, "If you get a dream when you sleep, tell it to me, and I will do the same." |
| Ch.21 p.107 para.4 sent.2 | Ia kaua nō i moe iho nei, hele aku nei nō kaua a ma nahelehele, moe ʻoe i kou pūha lāʻau, a ʻo wau nō hoʻi ma koʻu pūha lāʻau. | as we slept we went into the thicket: you slept in your hollow tree and I in mine: |
| Ch.21 p.107 para.4 sent.5 | A ma hope, he manu ʻokoʻa ka manu nana i lele mai a hoʻomoe i ua pūnana nei. | And by-and-by another bird flew hither and sat upon the nest, |
| Ch.21 p.107 para.6 sent.3 | No laila, ma kēia kakahiaka, e lilo ana ka wahine a ʻolua ia ʻoe. | Therefore this very morning the woman shall be yours. |
| Ch.21 p.107 para.6 sent.4 | Iā Waka e hoʻouna aʻe ai ia Lāʻieikawai ma luna o ka ʻēheu o na manu no ka hoʻāo me Kekalukaluokēwā, uhi mai auaneʻi ka noe a me ke ʻawa. | When Waka sends Laieikawai on the wings of the birds for the marriage with Kekalukaluokewa, mist and fog will cover the land: |
| Ch.21 p.107 para.6 sent.5 | A mao aʻe, a laila, ʻike ʻia aku ʻekolu ʻoukou e kū mai ana ma kua nalu, a laila, e ʻike auaneʻi ʻoe he mana koʻu e uhi aku ma luna o Waka, a ʻike ʻole ʻo ia i kaʻu mea e hana aku ai nou. | when it clears, then you three will appear riding on the crest of the wave, then you shall see that I have power to veil Waka's face from seeing what I am doing for you: |
| Ch.21 p.107 para.6 sent.6 | No laila, e kū kāua a hele aku ma kahi e kokoke aku ana i kahi e hoʻāo ai ʻo Lāʻieikawai.” | so let us arise and get near to the place where Laieikawai weds." |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.1 sent.1 | A pau ka hōʻike ʻana a Maliʻo i ke ʻano o kēia mau mea, iho akula lāua a ma kahi kūpono iā lāua e noho ai. | After Malio's explanation of the dream was ended they went right to the place where the others were. |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.2 sent.1 | Iā lāua i hiki aku ai ma Keaʻau, ʻike akula lāua iā Kekalukaluokēwā e ʻau aʻe ana i ka heʻe nalu. | When they came to Keaau they saw Kekalukaluokewa swimming out for surf riding. |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.2 sent.3 | Inā i hiki ʻoukou ma kūlana heʻe nalu, a heʻe ʻoukou i ka nalu, mai hoʻopae ʻoe. | When you get on the back of the wave and glide along with the breaker, do not ride — |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.2 sent.12 | A laila, pule aeae ma kuʻu inoa, a naʻu nō e hoʻouna aku i nalu ma luna o ʻolua. | then pray in my name and I will send a wave over you; |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.3 sent.1 | Iā lāua nō e kamaʻilio ana i kēia mau mea, uhi ana ka noe a Waka ma luna o ka ʻāina. | While they were talking Waka covered the land with a mist. |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.3 sent.2 | I ia manawa, kuʻi ka hekili, aia ʻo Lāʻieikawai ma kūlana nalu, na Waka ia. | Then the thunder pealed and there was Laieikawai on the crest of the wave. This was Waka's work. |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.3 sent.4 | I ka mao ʻana aʻe o ka noe, aia ʻekolu poʻe e lana ana ma kūlana nalu e kū ana, a he mea haʻohaʻo ia iā uka i ka nānā aku. | When the mist cleared three persons floated on the crest of the wave, and this was a surprise to the onlookers. |
| Ch.21 p.108 para.4 sent.3 | A iā lākou ʻekolu ma kūlana heʻe nalu, ʻaʻole kekahi leo i lohe ʻia i waena o lākou. | While they rode the surf not one word was heard between them. |
| Ch.21 p.109 para.3 sent.2 | Iā Kekalukaluokēwā me Lāʻieikawai i hoʻomaka ai e hoʻomoe aku i ka nalu, e hopu aku ana ʻo Halaaniani ma nā kapuaʻi o Lāʻieikawai, a lilo maila ma kona lima, lilo akula ka papa heʻe nalu o Lāʻieikawai, pae akula naʻe ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā a kau a kahi maloʻo. | As Kekalukaluokewa and Laieikawai lay resting on the wave, Halaaniani caught Laieikawai by the soles of her feet and got his arm around her, and Laieikawai's surf board was lost. Kekalukaluokewa rode in alone and landed on the dry beach. |
| Ch.21 p.109 para.4 sent.1 | I kēlā manawa i lilo aku ai ʻo Lāʻieikawai ma ka lima o Halaaniani, ʻōlelo akula iā Halaaniani, “He mea kupanaha! | When Laieikawai was in Halaaniani's arms she said, "This is strange! |
| Ch.21 p.109 para.7 sent.2 | I ia manawa a lāua e ʻau ana, haʻi akula ʻo Halaaniani i kāna ʻōlelo i mua o ke aliʻi wahine, “Ma kēia ʻau ʻana a kāua, mai ʻalawa ʻoe i hope, i mua nō nā maka. | and while they swam Halaaniani bade the princess, ''As we swim do not look back, face
ahead; |
| Ch.21 p.109 para.7 sent.3 | Aia nō iaʻu ma kūlana nalu, a laila, haʻi aku au iā ʻoe.” | when my crest is here, then I will tell you. |
| Ch.21 p.109 para.9 sent.2 | Ma kaʻu ʻōlelo mua iā ʻoe, ma laila wale nō kāua.” | at my first word to you there will be something for us." |
| Ch.21 p.109 para.9 sent.3 | Hoʻolohe akula nō ʻo Lāʻieikawai ma nā ʻōlelo a kona hoa heʻe nalu. | Laieikawai listened for the word of her surfing comrade. |
| Ch.21 p.111 para.1 sent.1 | A pau kā lāua kamaʻilio ʻana no kēia mau ʻōlelo, pule akula ʻo Halaaniani i ko lāua akua ma ka inoa o kona kaikuahine e like me kā Maliʻo kauoha mua. | At the close of this speech Halaaniani prayed to their god in the name of his sister, as Malio had directed. |
| Ch.21 p.111 para.2 sent.1 | I ia manawa, hoʻomoe koke ʻo Lāʻieikawai i ka papa, ʻo ka pae akula nō ia ma ke kōkua aku o Halaaniani. | Then Laieikawai quickly lay down on the board and with Halaaniani's help rode toward the shore. |
| Ch.21 p.111 para.2 sent.3 | I ʻalawa hou aku ʻo Lāʻieikawai, e kau mai ana ʻo Halaaniani ma ka peʻa o ka nalu, ma kona akamai nui. | Laieikawai looked again; Halaaniani with great dexterity was resting on the very tip of the wave. |
| Ch.21 p.111 para.3 sent.2 | A ʻo Maliʻo, ke kaikuahine o Halaaniani, ua ʻike ʻia ma kona kuamoʻo moʻolelo, he hiki iā ia ke hana i nā hana mana he nui. | Malio, the sister of Halaaniani, as is seen in the story of her life, can do many marvelous things, |
| Ch.21 p.111 para.3 sent.3 | Ma ka mokuna iwakāluakumamālua a me ka mokuna iwakāluakumamākolu e ʻike ai kākou i ka nui o kāna mau hana mana. | and in Chapters XXII and XXIII yon will see what great deeds she had power to perform. |
| Ch.22 p.113 para.2 sent.2 | A i ka mao ʻana aʻe, ʻo nā papa heʻe nalu wale nō ke waiho ana; aia akula ʻo Lāʻieikawai me Halaaniani i uka o Paliuli ma ko Lāʻieikawai hale. | and when the mist passed off only the surf boards remained; Laieikawai was with Halaaniani in her house up at Paliuli. |
| Ch.22 p.113 para.2 sent.3 | Ma laila ʻo Halaaniani i lawe ai iā Lāʻieikawai i wahine hoʻāo nāna. | There Halaaniani took Laieikawai to wife. |
| Ch.22 p.113 para.3 sent.4 | A no kēia haʻohaʻo a Waka, ma ke awakea o ka lua o ka lā o ko Lāʻieikawai lā hui me Halaaniani, hele akula ke kupuna wahine e ʻike i ka pono o kāna moʻopuna. | Because Waka was surprised, at midday of the second day after Laieikawai joined Halaaniani. the grandmother went to look after her grandchild. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.2 sent.3 | No laila, ke haʻi aku nei wau i kuʻu manaʻo paʻa iā ʻoe, ʻaʻole wau e ʻike hou i kou maka, e kuʻu moʻopuna, ma kēia hope aku a hiki i kuʻu lā make, no ka mea, ua pale ʻoe i kaʻu mau ʻōlelo. | Therefore, I give you my oath never to see your face again, my grandchild, from this time until I die, for you have disobeyed me. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.2 sent.4 | Kainoa wau e ʻāhaʻi nei iā ʻoe ma kahi nalo, e nānā mai ana ʻoe iaʻu. | I thought to hide you away until you could care for me. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.3 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o kēia manawa, hoʻomākaukau aʻela ʻo Waka e hana i hale hou i like me ka hale i hana ʻia no Lāʻieikawai. | After this Waka made ready to build another house like that she had built for Laieikawai. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.3 sent.2 | A ma ka mana o Waka, ua hikiwawe, ua paʻa ka hale. | And by Waka's art the house was speedily completed. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.4 sent.2 | A hiki ʻo Waka ma kahi o Kekalukaluokēwā, hopu akula ma nā wāwae me ka naʻau kaumaha, a ʻōlelo akula, “He nui kuʻu kaumaha a me kuʻu aloha iā ʻoe, e ke Aliʻi, no ka mea, ua ʻupu aku wau i kaʻu moʻopuna ʻo ʻoe ke kāne e ola ai kēia mau iwi. | When Waka reached Kekalukaluokewa's place, she clasped his feet and said, with sorrowful heart: "Great is my grief and my love for you, O chief, for I desired you for my grandchild as the man to save these bones. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.5 sent.1 | Ma mua o ko Waka kiʻi ʻana iā Lāʻielohelohe, kauoha ihola ʻo ia iā Kekalukaluokēwā, “Ke holo nei wau ʻekolu anahulu me nā pō keu ʻekolu, a laila, hiki mai wau. | Before Waka went after Laielohelohe she commanded Kekalukaluokewa as follows: "I shall be gone three times ten days and three days over, then I shall return. |
| Ch.22 p.115 para.6 sent.1 | Ma ka manaʻo paʻa o Waka, ua holo maila ʻo ia a hiki i Oʻahu nei, ma Honouliuli, kau nā waʻa. | According to her determination, Waka sailed to Oahu, where the canoes landed at Honouliuli |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.1 sent.1 | Piʻi akula ʻo Waka a hiki i Kūkaniloko, hoʻokokoke akula ʻo ia ma kahi i hūnā ʻia ai ʻo Lāʻielohelohe, hahau akula i ka puaʻa i mua o ke kahuna me ka pule ʻana. | Waka went up and reached Kukaniloko; she drew near the place where Laielohelohe was hidden, held the pig out to the priest and prayed, |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.3 sent.1 | I ia manawa komo akula ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa me Waka ma kahi kapu, kahi hoʻi i hūnā ʻia ai ʻo Lāʻielohelohe. | Then Waka entered with Kapukaihaoa the taboo place where Laielohelohe was hidden; |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.3 sent.2 | Hoʻonoho ʻia ihola ʻo Waka, a komo akula ke kahuna ma kahi i hūnā ʻia ai. | Waka waited and the priest went still farther into the place |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.4 sent.1 | I ka lā i lawe ʻia ai ʻo Lāʻielohelohe a kau i luna o nā waʻa, i ia manawa, lawe aʻela ke kahuna i ka piko o kāna hānai a lei ihola ma kona ʻāʻī. | On the day when Laielohelohe went on board the canoe, then the priest took his foster child's umbilical cord and wore it about his neck. |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.4 sent.2 | Akā, ʻaʻole i kaumaha kona manaʻo no Lāʻielohelohe, no ka mea, ua manaʻo nō he pōmaikaʻi e ili mai ana ma luna ona. | But he did not sorrow for Laielohelohe, thinking how good fortune had come to her. |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.7 sent.1 | I kekahi lā, ma ke kakahiaka, i loko o ko ke aliʻi manawa i ala mai ai mai ka hiamoe mai, ʻike aʻela ʻo ia i ka hōʻailona a Waka i kauoha ai, no ka mea, aia ka pūnohu i ka moana. | The next day, in the early morning, when the chief awoke from sleep, he saw the sign which Waka had promised, for there was the colored cloud on the ocean. |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.8 sent.1 | Ma ka ʻauinalā, ʻike maopopo ʻia akula nā waʻa, ʻākoakoa aʻela nā kānaka a pau ma ke awa pae waʻa e ʻike i ke aliʻi, i ka manaʻo, e puka aku ana a hālāwai me ke kāne. | In the afternoon, when the double canoes came in sight, all the people crowded to the landing place to see the chief, thinking she would come ashore and meet her husband. |
| Ch.22 p.116 para.8 sent.2 | I ka hoʻokokoke ʻana aku o nā waʻa ma ke awa, i ia manawa ka uhi ʻana mai o ka ʻohu a me ka noe mai Paliuli mai. | When the canoe approached the shore, then fog and mist covered the land from Paliuli to the sea. |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.1 sent.1 | I ia manawa, kāʻili ʻia akula ʻo Lāʻielohelohe me Waka ma loko o ka ʻohu, ma luna o nā manu a hiki i Paliuli, a hoʻonoho iā Lāʻielohelohe ma ka hale i hoʻomākaukau ʻia nona. | Then Laielohelohe and Waka were borne under cover of the mist on the birds to Paliuli, and Laielohelohe was placed in the house prepared for her |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.1 sent.2 | Ma laila ʻo ia i noho ai a loaʻa hou iā Halaaniani. | and stayed there until Halaaniani took her. |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.2 sent.1 | ʻEkolu mau lā o Waka ma Paliuli mai ka hoʻi ʻana mai Oʻahu aku nei. | Three days was Waka at Paliuli after returning from Oahu. |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.3 sent.1 | Iā Waka i hiki aku ai ma ko Kekalukaluokēwā wahi, ʻōlelo akula, “Ua hiki mai ko wahine, no laila, e hoʻomākaukau ʻoe i kanahā lā. | Then Waka came to Kekalukaluokewa and .said, "Your wife has come, so prepare yourself in forty days; |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.3 sent.2 | E kuahaua aku i nā mea a pau e ʻākoakoa mai ma ko ʻolua wahi e hui ai. | summon all the people to assemble at the place where you two shall meet; |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.3 sent.3 | E hana i pāpaʻi kilu, ma laila e hoʻohilahila aku ai iā Lāʻieikawai, i ʻike ai ʻo ia i ka ʻino o kāna hana.” | make a kilu, shelter; there disgrace Laieikawai, that she may see what wrong she has done. |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.4 sent.1 | I ka manawa naʻe i lawe aku ai ʻo Waka i ka mana ma luna o Lāʻieikawai, a laila, kūkākūkā aʻela nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua i ka mea e pono ai ko lākou noho ʻana, a hoʻoholo aʻela ua mau kaikamāhine nei i kā lākou ʻōlelo e pane aku ai iā Lāʻieikawai. | At the time when Waka took away her supernatural protection from Laieikawai, Aiwohikupua's sisters took counsel as to what they had better do; and they agreed upon what they should say to Laieikawai. |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.4 sent.3 | No laila, e like me ko kākou hoʻohiki ʻana ma mua, 'No kekahi o kākou ka pilikia, ma laila pū kākou a pau,' no laila, ua loaʻa iho nei iā ʻoe ka pilikia, no kākou pū ia pilikia. | Therefore, as we agreed in former days , 'Adversity to one is adversity to all;' now that you are in trouble, we will share your trouble. |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.5 sent.3 | A, i loaʻa ka pōmaikaʻi iaʻu ma kēia hope aku, a laila, e hoʻolilo nō wau iā ʻoukou a pau i mau mea nui ma luna oʻu.” | Should fortune come to me hereafter, then I will place you far above myself." |
| Ch.22 p.117 para.6 sent.1 | I ka ʻahā malama paha i ko lāua noho hoʻāo ʻana, ma kekahi lā awakea, puka aʻela ʻo Halaaniani mai loko aʻe o ka hale. | Perhaps the fourth month of their union, one day at noon when Halaaniani opened the door |
| Ch.22 p.118 para.3 sent.2 | ʻĪ aku naʻe ʻo Lāʻieikawai i ua mau hoa lā, “Ke iho nei māua i kai ma ka makemake o ke kāne a kākou. | Laieikawai said to them, "We two are going to the sea, as our husband wishes. |
| Ch.22 p.118 para.5 sent.1 | Hala akula ʻo Halaaniani, iho akula nō hoʻi ʻo Lāʻieikawai a hiki i Keaʻau, ma kahi kaʻawale aʻe i pili ʻole aku iā Kekalukaluokēwā. | Halaaniani left her. Laieikawai went on to Keaau, and at a place not close to Kekalukaluokewa, |
| Ch.22 p.118 para.5 sent.2 | Noho ihola ʻo ia ma laila a pō ia lā, ʻaʻole i hoʻi mai kāna kāne. | there she remained; and night fell, and the husband did not return; |
| Ch.23 p.119 para.1 sent.3 | “He ʻumikumamākahi lā e kali ai” kona mau hoa iā ia, a i “hoʻi ʻole aku” i nā lā i kauoha ʻia e like me kā kākou kamaʻilio ʻana aʻe nei ma ka mokuna iwakāluakumamālua, a laila, maopopo, ua pono ʻole. | "Wait for me ten days, and should I not return," she had bidden them as told in Chapter XXII; so clearly she was in trouble. |
| Ch.23 p.119 para.2 sent.1 | A hiki lākou ma Keaʻau, iā lākou e kokoke aku ana e hiki, ʻike mua maila ʻo Lāʻieikawai i kona mau hoa, paʻiāuma maila me ka uē. | They went to Keaau, and as they approached and Laieikawai spied her counsellors she poured out her grief with wailing. |
| Ch.23 p.119 para.2 sent.2 | Akā, he mea haʻohaʻo naʻe ia i kona mau hoa ka uē ʻana, a ua akāka kāna kauoha “ua pono ʻole lāua” ma ka uē ʻana a Lāʻieikawai a me nā helehelena o ka pōʻino, no ka mea, aia ʻo Lāʻieikawai e kukuli ana i ka honua, a ʻo kekahi lima, ua peʻa aʻela ma ke kua, a ʻo kekahi lima, aia ma ka lae, a uē helu akula ʻo ia penei: | Now her counsellors marveled at her wailing and remembered her saying "some evil has befallen"; at her wailing and at her gestures of distress, for Laieikawai was kneeling on the ground with one hand clapped across her back and the other at her forehead, and she wailed aloud as follows: |
| Ch.23 p.120 para.5 sent.1 | ʻŌlelo maila ʻo Lāʻieikawai, “Ua make, no ka mea, iā māua nō i iho mai ai a ma uka aʻe nei lā, ʻo ka hiki mai nō hoʻi ia i kai nei, ʻōlelo mai nō kēlā iaʻu, 'E iho ʻē ʻoe ma mua, e piʻi aʻe au e ʻike i ko kaikoʻeke. | Said Laieikawai, "He is dead, for on the way down, just above here, he said, 'You go ahead and I will go up and see your sister-in-law, |
| Ch.23 p.121 para.2 sent.2 | Haʻi maila ʻo Mailehaʻiwale i ka moe i loaʻa iā ia, “i uka nō i Paliuli, hele aʻela nō ʻo Halaaniani a lawe aʻe ana nō iā ʻoe (Kahalaomāpuana), a hele aku nei nō ʻolua ma kahi ʻē aku. | Mailehaiwale told the dream that had come to her: "It was up at Paliuli, Halaaniani came and took you, Kahalaomapuana, and you two went away somewhere; |
| Ch.23 p.121 para.4 sent.1 | (Ma kēia wahi, e kamaʻilio kākou no Halaaniani, a ma ʻaneʻi kākou e ʻike ai i kona kalohe launa ʻole.) | (At this place we shall tell of Halaaniani, and here we shall see his clever trickery.) |
| Ch.23 p.121 para.5 sent.1 | Ma kēlā ʻōlelo a Halaaniani iā Lāʻieikawai, e piʻi e hālāwai me Maliʻo, iā lāua i hoʻokaʻawale ai ma hope iho o kā Halaaniani kauoha ʻana iā ia, piʻi akula ʻo ia a hālāwai pū me Maliʻo. | When Halaaniani told Laieikawai he was going up to see Malio, this was in order to get away from her after giving her his commands. The fellow went up and met Malio. |
| Ch.23 p.121 para.7 sent.1 | “Ma ke awakea o nehinei, iaʻu i puka aʻe ai i waho mai ko māua hale aʻe, ʻike akula wau i kēia kaikamahine ʻōpiopio i maikaʻi kona mau helehelena. | "Yesterday morning when I went outside my house I saw this young girl with the lovely face; |
| Ch.23 p.121 para.7 sent.3 | A no koʻu manaʻo ʻo ʻoe nō ka mea nāna e hoʻopōmaikaʻi nei iaʻu ma nā mea aʻu e makemake ai, no laila wau i hiki hou mai nei.” | And because I remembered that you were the one who fulfilled my wishes, therefore I have come up here again." |
| Ch.23 p.121 para.8 sent.5 | ʻAʻole e loaʻa iaʻu ma kuʻu mana, no ka mea, ʻelua lāua.” | I can not do it by my power, for they are two." |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.1 sent.2 | A lohe ʻo Maliʻo i kēia mau mea, a laila, haʻi akula ʻo ia i nā mea hiki ke hana ʻia aku no Lāʻielohelohe e kona kaikunāne, me ka ʻī aku iā Halaaniani, “E hoʻi ʻoe a ma ka waenakonu o ka pō, a laila, piʻi mai ʻoe i oʻu nei i hele aku ai kāua ma kahi o Lāʻielohelohe.” | When Malio heard the story she told her brother what to do to win Laielohelohe, and said to Halaaniani, "Go now, and in the middle of the night come up here to me, and we two will go to Laielohelohe's place." |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.2 sent.2 | Lālau aʻela kona kaikuahine i ka pū lāʻī, a hele akula me kona kaikunāne a kokoke akula lāua ma kahi a Lāʻielohelohe e kui lehua mau ai. | His sister took a ti-leaf trumpet and went with her brother, and close to the place where Laielohelohe was wont to string lehua blossoms. |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.3 sent.1 | I ia manawa, ʻōlelo akula ʻo Maliʻo iā Halaaniani, “E piʻi ʻoe ma luna o kekahi lāʻau, ma kahi ou e ʻike aku ana iā Lāʻielohelohe, a ma laila ʻoe e noho ai. | Then Malio said to Halaaniani, "You climb up in the lehua tree where you can see Laielohelohe, and there you stay. |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.5 sent.1 | I ia manawa, pili aʻela ʻo Halaaniani ma kekahi kumulāʻau, a nānā akula. | Then Halaaniani climbed up the trunk of a tree and kept watch. |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.5 sent.2 | Iā ia nei ma luna o ka lāʻau, kani ana ka pū lāʻī a Maliʻo. | "When he was up the tree, Malio's trumpet sounded, |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.7 sent.2 | Hoʻi akula lāua ma ko lāua wahi, a ma kekahi kakahiaka aʻe, hiki hou nō lāua i kahi mua a lāua i hoʻohālua ai. | The two returned home, and very early in the morning, they came again to the same place where they lay in ambush before. |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.8 sent.1 | Iā lāua nei a hiki iho, hiki ana nō ʻo Lāʻielohelohe ma kona wahi mau. | No sooner were they arrived than Laielohelohe arrived also at her customary station. |
| Ch.23 p.122 para.8 sent.2 | Ma mua naʻe o ko lāua hiki ʻana aku, ua haʻi mua aku ʻo Maliʻo i kāna ʻōlelo i kona kaikunāne penei, “E haku ʻoe i lehua, a huihui a lilo i mea hoʻokahi. | Malio had already instructed her brother, as follows: "Take lehua flowers, bind them into a cluster, |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.1 sent.1 | Piʻi aʻela ʻo Halaaniani i luna o kekahi lāʻau ma kahi kūpono iā Lāʻielohelohe. | Halaaniani climbed the tree right over where Laielohelohe was wont to sit. |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.1 sent.3 | I ia wā nō hoʻi ko Halaaniani hoʻolei ʻana iho i ka pōpō lehua mai luna iho o ka lāʻau, a hāʻule pololei ihola ma ke alo ponoʻī o Lāʻielohelohe. | Halaaniani dropped the bunch of lehua flowers down from the tree, and it fell directly in front of Laielohelohe. |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.2 sent.5 | Hoʻi akula lāua, a ma kekahi kakahiaka ʻana aʻe, piʻi hou akula. | They went home and returned early in the morning. |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.3 sent.1 | Iā lāua i hiki aku ai a noho iho, hiki maila ʻo Lāʻielohelohe ma kona wahi mau e kui lehua ai. | When they had taken their stations, Laielohelohe came as usual to string lehua blossoms. |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.5 sent.3 | E hoʻi ʻolua ma ko ʻolua wahi, mai hele hou mai, no ka mea, ʻo ʻoe wale nō kaʻu mea i ʻae aku ai e hāʻawi i koʻu aloha nou ma ko kāua honi ʻana. | you both go back to your own place and do not come here again. For it was only you I promised to greet with a kiss, |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.6 sent.2 | Akā, hoʻāʻo wau ma kuʻu mana i kō ai kou makemake.” | but I will try my supernatural arts to fulfill your desire." |
| Ch.23 p.123 para.7 sent.2 | Iā Halaaniani i hiki ai ma Keaʻau, ma muli o ke kauoha a kona kaikuahine, ʻaʻole ʻo ia i ʻike, a i lohe hoʻi no Lāʻieikawai. | When Halaaniani came to Keaau as his sister directed, he neither saw nor heard of Laieikawai. |
| Ch.24 p.125 para.5 sent.1 | I ke kokoke ʻana aku i ua lā nui nei, iho akula ʻo Waka mai Paliuli aku e hālāwai me Kekalukaluokēwā, a ʻōlelo akula ʻo Waka iā Kekalukaluokēwā: “ʻApōpō, i ka puka ʻana o ka lā, e kuahaua ʻoe i nā kānaka a pau a me kou aloaliʻi e hele aku ma kahi āu i hoʻomākaukau ai no ka hoʻokahakahaka. | When the great day drew near, Waka went down from Paliuli to meet Kekalukaluokewa, and Waka said to Kekalukaluokewa: "To- morrow at sunrise call together all the people and the chiefs of the household to the place prepared for the celebration; |
| Ch.24 p.125 para.5 sent.2 | Ma laila e ʻākoakoa ai nā mea a pau. | there let all be assembled. |
| Ch.24 p.125 para.5 sent.4 | Aia a hiki aku ma hope iho o ka ʻauinalā, i ia manawa, e hoʻouhi aku wau i ka noe ma luna o ka ʻāina, a ma luna hoʻi o kahi e ʻākoakoa ai nā kānaka. | until day declines, then I will send a mist to cover the land, and the place where the people are assembled. |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.1 sent.1 | “Aia a hoʻomaka mai ke poʻi ʻana o ka noe ma ka ʻāina, a laila, e kali ʻoe i ia wā a lohe ʻoe i ka leo ʻikuā a nā manu, a haʻalele wale. | "When the mist begins to close down over the land, then wait until you hear the birds singing and they cease; |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.2 sent.1 | “A ma hope o ia manawa, e hoʻopau aku nō wau i ka noe ma luna o ka ʻāina. | "And after that I will lift the mist over the land. |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.5 sent.1 | “Aia a kūpinaʻi mai ka leo o nā ʻiʻiwi pōlena, a laila, aia ko wahine ma ke kihi hema o ka ʻaha. | "When the voice of the iiwipolena sounds, your wife is on the left side of the place of meeting. |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.5 sent.2 | A ma ia hope koke iho o ia manawa, e lohe auaneʻi ʻoe i ka leo o nā kāhuli e ʻikuā ana, i ia manawa e hui ai ʻolua ma ke kaʻawale. | Soon after this, you will hear the land snails singing, then do you two meet apart from the assembly. |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.6 sent.1 | “Iā ʻolua e hui ana, hoʻokahi hekili e kuʻi i ia manawa, nākolo ka honua, haʻalulu ka ʻaha a pau, i ia manawa, e hoʻouna aku wau iā ʻolua ma luna o nā manu. | "And when you two meet, a single peal of thunder will crash, the earth tremble, the whole place of assembly shall shake. Then I will send you two on the birds, |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.7 sent.1 | Ma mua iho nei, ua ʻōlelo ʻia, ua hiki aku ʻo Halaaniani i Keaʻau e ʻike i ka pono o kāna wahine (Lāʻieikawai). | Already has Halaaniani's expedition been described to look after his wife Laieikawai at Keaau, |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.8 sent.1 | I kēlā lā a Waka i hiki ai i Keaʻau e hālāwai me Kekalukaluokēwā e like me kā kākou ʻike ʻana ma luna aʻe, ʻo ia nō ka lā a Maliʻo i ʻōlelo aku ai iā Halaaniani e hoʻomākaukau no ka iho e ʻike i ka lā hoʻokahakaha o Lāʻielohelohe mā, me ka ʻī aku naʻe o Maliʻo i kona kaikunāne, “ʻApōpō, i ka lā hoʻokahakaha o Lāʻielohelohe me Kekalukaluokēwā, i ia manawa e lilo ai ʻo Lāʻielohelohe iā ʻoe. | On the day when Waka went to Keaau to meet Kekalukaluokewa, as we have seen above. On that very day. Malio told Halaaniani to get ready to go down to the festival, saying: "To-morrow, at the marriage celebration of Kekalukaluokewa and Laielohelohe, then Laielohelohe shall be yours. |
| Ch.24 p.126 para.9 sent.3 | Aia a hiki i ka ʻauinalā, a ma hope iho o ia manawa, e kiʻi mai ʻoe, a iho aku kākou.” | Be ready to take us down soon after the sun begins to decline." |
| Ch.24 p.127 para.2 sent.1 | A ʻike ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā i kēia noe i uhi mua mai ma luna o ka ʻāina, a laila, hoʻomanaʻo aʻela ia i ke kauoha a Waka. | When Kekalukaluokewa saw this mist begin to descend over the land, then he remembered Waka's charge. |
| Ch.24 p.127 para.2 sent.3 | Ma hope iho o ia manawa, lohe aʻela kēia i ka leo o ka ʻewaʻewa iki a me ke kāhuli, i ia manawa, puka akula ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā mai kona hale aku a kū ma waho o ka ʻaha ma kahi kaʻawale. | After hearing the voices of the ewaewaiki and the land shells, then Kekalukaluokewa came out of his house and stood apart from the assembly. |
| Ch.24 p.127 para.7 sent.5 | ʻAʻole nō hoʻi e lilo ka leo ma kona pane ʻole aku iā Halaaniani, a laila, ua wahine nō ʻoe. | not even to open her lips to Halaaniani, then she is your wife, |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.1 sent.1 | Iā lāua i kokoke e hiki aku, hoʻouna akula ʻo Waka i ka noe a me ka ʻohu ma luna o ka ʻaha, a ʻike ʻole kekahi i kekahi. | As they approached, Waka sent the clouds and mist over the assembly, and they could not distinguish one from another. |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.1 sent.2 | I ia manawa i hoʻouna aku ai ʻo Waka iā Kekalukaluokēwā ma luna o nā manu, a i ka mao ʻana aʻe o ka noe, aia hoʻi e kau pū mai ana ʻo Lāʻielohelohe me Kekalukaluokēwā i luna o nā manu, a laila, ʻuā aʻela ke anaina kanaka a puni ka ʻaha, “Hoʻāo nā aliʻi ē! | Then Waka sent Kekalukaluokewa upon the birds, and when the clouds cleared, lo! Laielohelohe and Kekalukaluokewa sat together upon the birds. Then the congregation shouted all about the place of assembly: "The marriage of the chiefs! |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.4 sent.1 | A ma ko ke aliʻi kāne manaʻo paʻa e hoʻi nō i Kauaʻi, lawe aʻela ʻo ia i kāna wahine me ko lāua kupuna wahine i Kauaʻi. | And when the chief resolved to return to Kauai, he took his wife and their grandmother to Kauai, |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.4 sent.3 | A mākaukau lākou e hoʻi, haʻalele lākou iā Keaʻau, hiki mua lākou i Oʻahu nei ma Honouliuli, a lawe aʻela iā Kapūkaʻihaoa me lākou i Kauaʻi. | When they were ready to return, they left Keaau, went first to Honouliuli on Oahu and there took Kapukaihaoa with them to Kauai; |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.4 sent.4 | A hiki lākou i Kauaʻi ma Pihanakalani, a ili aʻela ka hoʻoponopono o nā ʻāina a me ke aupuni iā Kapūkaʻihaoa a hoʻolilo ʻia ihola ʻo Waka, ʻo ia ke kolu o ka hoʻoilina o ka noho aliʻi. | and they went to Kauai, to Pihanakalani, and turned over the rule over the land and its divisions to Kapukaihaoa, and Waka was made the third heir to the chief's seat. |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.5 sent.1 | (Ma kēia wahi, e kamaʻilio kākou no Lāʻieikawai, a me kona loaʻa ʻana i ka makāula, iā Hulumāniani.) | (At this place let us tell of Laieikawai and her meeting with the prophet, Hulumaniani.) |
| Ch.24 p.128 para.6 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai mā ma ʻOlaʻa, e noho ana nō ʻo ia me kona nani. | Laieikawai was at Olaa as beautiful as ever, |
| Ch.25 p.129 para.1 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai mā i hoʻi aku ai mai Keaʻau aku, ma hope iho o kona hoʻohilahila ʻana e Waka, a noho ma ʻOlaʻa, i ia manawa, kūkākūkā aʻela nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua i ka mea hiki ke hōʻoluʻolu aku i ka naʻau kaumaha o ke aliʻi (Lāʻieikawai) no kona hilahila i ka ʻōlelo kumakaia a Waka. | When Laieikawai returned from Keaau after Waka had disgraced her, and dwelt at Olaa. Then Aiwohikupua's sisters consulted how to comfort the heavy heart of the princess, Laieikawai, for her shame at Waka's reproaches. |
| Ch.25 p.129 para.1 sent.4 | No laila, e ke Aliʻi ē, ke noi aku nei mākou iā ʻoe, e pono nō e hoʻopau ʻia kou naʻau kaumaha, no ka mea, e hiki mai ana iā ʻoe ka pōmaikaʻi ma kēia manawa aku. | "Therefore, princess, we beseech you, best ease your heart of sorrow; good fortune shall be yours hereafter. |
| Ch.25 p.129 para.1 sent.7 | Ua hoʻonoho ʻia ma ka peʻa kapu o Kūkulu o Tahiti. | who dwells in the taboo house at the borders of Tahiti, |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.3 sent.3 | Ma kāna wahi e hele ai, ma laila ʻoukou; nā mea āna a pau e makemake ai, ʻo ia kā ʻoukou a hoʻokō aku. | wherever she goes, there you go, whatever she wishes, that is yours to fulfill; |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.4 sent.1 | (Ma kēia wahi, e waiho iki i ke kamaʻilio ʻana no kēia mea. | (At this place we will leave off speaking of this journey; |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.4 sent.2 | E pono iā kākou e kamaʻilio no Lāʻieikawai a me kona loaʻa ʻana i ka makāula nāna i ʻike mai Kauaʻi mai e like me ka mea i ʻōlelo ʻia ma nā mokuna mua ʻelua o kēia kaʻao). | we must tell about Laieikawai and her meeting with the prophet who followed her from Kauai hither, as related in the first two chapters of this story.) |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.5 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o kēia mau mea, haʻalele ihola ʻo Kahalaomāpuana i kona mau kaikuaʻana, a kau akula ma luna o ua moʻo nui nei (Kihanuilūlūmoku), a kiʻi akula iā Kaʻōnohiokalā. | After saying all this, Kahalaomapuana left her sisters and was borne on the back of the big lizard Kihanuilulumoku and went to fetch Kaonohiokala. |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.6 sent.1 | Ma hope iho o ko Kahalaomāpuana haʻalele ʻana i kona mau kaikuaʻana, kupu aʻela i loko o Lāʻieikawai ka manaʻo makemake e kaʻapuni iā Hawaiʻi a puni. | After Kahalaomapuana left her sisters, the desire grew within Laieikawai's mind to travel around Hawaii. |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.7 sent.1 | Ma kēia huakaʻi kaʻapuni a ke aliʻi, ma Kaʻū mua, ma Kona, a hiki lākou ma Kaiʻōpae i Kohala, ma ka ʻaoʻao ʻākau mai Kawaihae mai, ʻaneʻane ʻelima mile ka lōʻihi mai Kawaihae aʻe, ma laila lākou i noho ai i kekahi mau lā, no ka mea, ua makemake ihola ke aliʻi wahine e hōʻoluʻolu ma laila. | On the princess's journey around Hawaii they went first to Kau, then Kona, until they reached Kaiopae in Kohala, on the right-hand side of Kawaihae, about five miles distant; there they stayed several days for the princess to rest. |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.8 sent.1 | I loko o ko lākou mau lā ma laila, ʻike maila ka makāula i ka piʻo a kēia ānuenue i kai, me he mea lā, i Kawaihae ponoʻī lā. | During the days they were there the seer saw the rainbow arching over the sea as if right at Kawaihae. |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.8 sent.2 | I uka naʻe o ʻOuli ma Waimea kahi a ka makāula i ʻike mai ai, no ka mea, ua ʻōlelo ʻia ma nā mokuna mua aʻe nei, ua hiki ka makāula ma Hilo i kaiwilahilahi, a ua lōʻihi nō nā makahiki ma laila o ke kali ʻana i kāna mea i ʻimi ai. | The uplands of Ouli at Waimea was the place the seer looked from. For in former chapters it has been told how the seer came to Hilo, to Kaiwilahilahi, and lived there some years waiting for the sign he was seeking. |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.8 sent.6 | Ma kēia hoʻi ʻana a hiki ma Waimea i ʻOuli, ʻo ia kā ka makāula ʻike ʻana aku i ka piʻo o ke ānuenue i kai o Kawaihae, a no ka māluhiluhi o ua makāula nei, ʻaʻole ʻo ia i wikiwiki mai e ʻike i ke ʻano o ke ānuenue, no laila, hoʻomaha ihola ʻo ia ma laila. | When he reached Waimea, at Ouli, there he saw the rainbow arching over the sea at Kawaihae.
And the seer was so weary he was not quick to recognize the rainbow, but he stayed there, |
| Ch.25 p.131 para.8 sent.7 | A ma kekahi lā aʻe, ʻaʻole ʻo ia i ʻike hou i kēlā hōʻailona. | and on the next day he did not see the sign again. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.1 sent.1 | Ma kekahi lā aʻe, haʻalele ka makāula i ia wahi, ʻo ia lā nō hoʻi ka lā a Lāʻieikawai mā i haʻalele ai iā Kaiʻōpae. | Next day the seer left the place, the very day when Laieikawai's party left Kaiopae, |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.1 sent.2 | Hoʻi akula a ma uka o Kahuā, ma Moʻolau ko lākou wahi i noho ai. | and came back above Kahuwa and stopped at Moolau. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.3 sent.2 | Haʻalele ka makāula i ia wahi, hiki akula ʻo ia ma Waikā a ma laila ʻo ia i noho ai, no ka mea, ua pōʻeleʻele ihola. | The seer left that place, went to Waika, for it was then dark. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.4 sent.1 | Ma ke kakahiaka ʻana aʻe, aia hoʻi, e piʻo ana ke ānuenue i kai o Kaiʻōpae, no ka mea, ua iho aku ʻo Lāʻieikawai i laila. | In the early morning, lo! the rainbow arched over the sea at Kaiopae, for Laieikawai had gone back there. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.5 sent.2 | Akā, ʻaʻole i loaʻa ka hōʻike ʻana ma ona lā, no laila, ʻaʻole ka makāula i waiho i kāna mau mōhai i mua o Lāʻieikawai. | but he got no answer that day. Therefore, the seer did not lay down his offering before Laieikawai. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.5 sent.3 | Hoʻi akula ka makāula, a noho ma uka o Waikā. | The seer returned and stayed above Waika. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.6 sent.1 | I kekahi lā aʻe, haʻalele ka makāula i ia wahi, hiki akula kēia ma Lamaloloa, a noho ihola ma laila. | The next day the seer left the place, went to Lamaloloa and remained there. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.6 sent.2 | I ia manawa, komo pinepine aʻela ʻo ia i loko o ka heiau i Pāhauna, ma laila ʻo ia i pule hoʻomau ai i kona akua. | Then he went repeatedly into the temple of Pahauna and there prayed unceasingly to his god. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.7 sent.1 | Ua lōʻihi nā lā ma hope iho o ka noho ʻana o Lāʻieikawai ma Moʻolau, haʻalele lākou i ia wahi. | After a number of days at Moolau, Laieikawai and her companions left that place. |
| Ch.25 p.132 para.7 sent.2 | Hele akula lākou a noho ma Puakea, a no kahi heʻe nalu ma laila, no laila, iā lākou ma laila e mākaʻikaʻi ana i ka heʻe nalu ʻana a nā kamaʻāina, ua nanea loa lākou ma laila. | They came and stayed at Puakea and, because the people of the place were surf riding, gladly remained. |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.1 sent.1 | Ma kekahi lā aʻe, ma ke awakea, i ka wā e laʻilaʻi ana ka lā ma luna o ka ʻāina, i ia wā ka makāula i puka aʻe ai mai loko aʻe o ka heiau ma hope iho o ka pau ʻana o kāna pule. | The next day at noon, when the sun shone clear over the land, the prophet went outside the temple after his prayer. |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.2 sent.1 | A no kēia mea, emi hope maila ʻo ia a ma ke kaʻawale, pule hou akula i kona akua e hōʻike mai i kāna mea e ʻimi nei, akā, ʻaʻole nō i loaʻa ka hōʻike ʻana ma ona lā. | So he fell back to a distance to pray again to his god to show him
if this was the one he was seeking, but he got no answer that day; |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.2 sent.3 | Hoʻopuka loa akula a ma kahi o Lāʻieikawai mā e noho ana. | He approached the place where Laieikawai and her sisters were sitting. |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.3 sent.1 | He mea pilikia loa i ka makāula ka ʻike ʻana aku iā Lāʻieikawai, a iā lākou ma kahi hoʻokahi, nīnau akula ka makāula iā Lāʻieikawai mā, “He aha kā ʻoukou mea e noho nei ma ʻaneʻi? | The seer was greatly disturbed at seeing Laieikawai, and when he had reached the spot, he asked Laieikawai and her companions, "Why do you sit here? |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.5 sent.1 | Nīnau hou aku ka makāula,” He aha kā ʻoukou hana ma ʻaneʻi?” | The seer asked again, "What are you doing here?" |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.6 sent.1 | “E noho ana mākou ma ʻaneʻi a kali ana i waʻa. | "We are sitting here, waiting for a canoe |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.8 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula ʻo Lāʻieikawai, “A inā e kau mākou ma ko waʻa, ʻaʻole anei āu hana ʻē aʻe no mākou?” | Said Laieikawai, "If we go on board your canoe, do you require anything of us?"' |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.9 sent.2 | Mai manaʻo ʻoukou i kuʻu ʻōlelo ʻana e kau wale ʻoukou ma luna o kuʻu waʻa, e hoʻohaumia aku ana au iā ʻoukou, akā, ʻo koʻu makemake, e lilo ʻoukou i mau kaikamāhine naʻu, me he mau kaikamāhine ponoʻī lā, i lilo ai ʻoukou i mea nāna e hoʻokaulana i koʻu inoa. | Do not suppose I have asked you on board my canoe in order to defile you; but my wish is to take you all as my daughters; such daughters as you can make my name famous, |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.10 sent.1 | Ma ke kakahiaka o kekahi lā aʻe, kau akula lākou ma luna o nā waʻa, a holo akula a kau ma Honuaʻula i Maui, a mai laila aku a Lahaina, a ma kekahi lā aʻe, i Molokaʻi. | Early in the morning of the next day they went on board the canoe and sailed and rested at Honuaula on Maui, and from there to Lahaina, and the next day to Molokai; |
| Ch.25 p.133 para.10 sent.2 | Haʻalele lākou iā Molokaʻi, hiki lākou ma Lāʻie, Koʻolauloa, a ma laila lākou i noho ai i kekahi mau lā. | they left Molokai, went to Laie, Koolauloa, and stayed there some days. |
| Ch.25 p.134 para.1 sent.1 | I ia lā a lākou e hiki ai ma Lāʻie, a i ia pō iho nō, ʻōlelo aʻela ʻo Lāʻieikawai i kona mau hoa a me ko lākou makua kāne hoʻokama. | On the day of their arrival at Laie, that night, Laieikawai said to her companions and to her foster father: |
| Ch.25 p.134 para.1 sent.4 | Ma laila koʻu wahi i hānai ʻia ai e koʻu kupuna wahine. | there I was brought up by my grandmother. |
| Ch.26 p.135 para.1 sent.2 | Akā hoʻi, i mea e maopopo leʻa ai, naue akula ka makāula ma kahi kaʻawale, a pule akula i kona akua e hōʻoiaʻiʻo mai i ka ʻōlelo a ke kaikamahine. | But in order to make sure, the seer withdrew to a distance and prayed to his god lo confirm the girl's story. |
| Ch.26 p.135 para.2 sent.1 | A pau kāna pule ʻana, hoʻi maila, a hiamoe ihola, a i loko a kona manawa hiamoe, hiki maila ma o ua makāula nei ke kuhikuhi ma ka hihiʻo mai kona akua mai, me ka ʻōlelo mai, “Ua hiki mai ka manawa e hoʻokō ʻia ai kou makemake, a e kuʻu ai hoʻi ka luhi o kou ʻimi ʻana i ka loa. | After praying he came back and went to sleep, and as he slept the seer received the assurance in a vision from his god, saying, "The time has come to fulfill your wishes, to free you from the weariness of your long search. |
| Ch.26 p.135 para.3 sent.2 | E waiho aku i kāu mōhai i mua ona me ka hoʻomaikaʻi mua ma ka inoa o kou akua. | and lay it before her, having blessed her in the name of your god. |
| Ch.26 p.135 para.4 sent.2 | E lawe koke aku iā lākou ma kēia pō nō i Kauaʻi, a hoʻonoho i nā pali o Hāʻena i uka o Honopūwaiakua.” | carry them at once to Kauai, this very night, and let them dwell on the cliff's of Haena in the uplands of Honopuwaiakua." |
| Ch.26 p.135 para.5 sent.1 | Ma kēia mea, puoho aʻela ka makāula mai kona hiamoe ʻana. | At this the seer awoke from his dream; |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.1 sent.1 | “A no laila, ke noi aku nei au iā ʻoe e ʻae mai e mālama ʻia kēia mau iwi ma kou lokomaikaʻi, e kuʻu Haku, a e waiho pū ʻia ka pōmaikaʻi me kaʻu mau mamo a hiki i kaʻu hanauna hope.” | "And therefore I beseech you to guard these bones under your special favor, my mistress, and to leave this trust to your descendants unto the last generation." |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.2 sent.2 | Akā, ma kēia hope aku, e kali ʻoe a loaʻa iaʻu he pōmaikaʻi ʻoi aku ma mua o ka pōmaikaʻi a me ka hanohano i loaʻa mua iaʻu, a laila, ʻo ʻoe pū kekahi me mākou i hoʻopōmaikaʻi ʻia.” | but hereafter I shall win honor beyond my former honor and glory; then you shall also rise to prosperity with us." |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.3 sent.2 | I ua makāula nei me kāna mau kaikamāhine ma uka o Honopūwaiakua, a he mau lā ko lākou ma laila, he mea mau i ua makāula nei ke kaʻahele i kekahi manawa. | Many days the seer lived here with his daughter above Honopuwaiakua. At one time the seer made one of his customary journeys. |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.4 sent.1 | I loko o kona lā e hele ana ma kona ʻano makāula, iā ia hoʻi i hiki aku ai i Wailua, aia hoʻi, ua hoʻākoakoa ʻia nā kaikamāhine puʻupaʻa a pau o Kauaʻi ma o ka poʻe kaukaualiʻi me nā kaikamāhine koʻikoʻi, ma muli naʻe o ka ʻōlelo kuahaua a ʻAiwohikupua, a lawe ʻia mai nā kaikamāhine puʻupaʻa i mua o ke aliʻi. | As he traveled in his character as seer he came to Wailua. Lo! all the virgin daughters of Kauai were gathered together, all of the rank of chief with the girls of well-to-do families, at the command of Aiwohikupua to bring the virgins before the chief, |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.5 sent.1 | A hiki akula ka makāula i loko o kēlā ʻākoakoa, aia hoʻi, ua hoʻākoakoa ʻia nā kaikamāhine ma kahi hoʻokahi, e kū ana i mua o ke aliʻi. | When the seer came within the crowd. lo! the maidens were assembled in one place before the chief. |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.6 sent.1 | Haʻi ʻia maila, “Ua kuahaua ʻia nā kaikamāhine puʻupaʻa a pau ma ke kauoha a ke aliʻi, a ʻo ka mea a ʻAiwohikupua e makemake ai, a laila, e lawe ʻo ia ʻelua mau kaikamāhine i mau wāhine nāna, a ʻo lāua nā mea pani ma ka hakahaka o Poliʻahu a me Hinaikamalama. | He was told, "All the virgins have been summoned by the chief's command, and the two who please Aiwohikupua, these he will take for his wives in place of Poliahu and Hinaikamalama, |
| Ch.26 p.136 para.7 sent.2 | Akā, ʻaʻole e hiki i kekahi o kēia poʻe kaikamāhine puʻupaʻa ke pani ma ka hakahaka o Poliʻahu a me Hinaikamalama. | but not one of these can fill the loss of Poliahu and Hinaikamalama. |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.3 sent.1 | “Inā e hele mai ua kaikamahine nei aʻu, a kū i loko o ke kai, he kaikoʻo ma ka moana. | "Should my daughter come hither and stand upon the sea, the ocean would be in tumult; |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.3 sent.2 | Inā e kū ma ka ʻāina, lulu ka makani, malu ka lā, ua ka ua, kuʻi ka hekili, ʻōlapa ka uila, ʻōpaʻipaʻi ka mauna, waikahe ka ʻāina, pualena ka moana i ka hele a kuʻu kaikamahine haku.” | if on land, the wind would blow, the sun be darkened, the rain fall, the thunder crash, the lightning flash, the mountain tremble, the land would be flooded, the ocean reddened, at the coming of my daughter and lord." |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.4 sent.4 | Ma ka manaʻo paʻa o kona poʻe ʻenemi, hoʻoholo ʻia aʻela ua makāula nei e lawe ʻia i loko o kahi paʻa, a ma laila ʻo ia e noho ai a make. | Through the persistence of his enemies, it was decided to make the seer fast within that place and let him stay there until he died. |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.5 sent.1 | Ma ka lā o ua makāula nei e hoʻopaʻa ʻia ai, a ma ia pō iho, ma ka wanaʻao, pule akula ʻo ia i kona akua, a ma kona ʻano makāula, ua hiki aku ka leo o kāna pule i mua o kona akua. | On the day of his imprisonment, that night at dawn, he prayed to his god. |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.5 sent.2 | A ma ka mālamalama loa ʻana aʻe, ue wehe ʻia ka puka o ka hale nona, a hele akula ʻo ia me kona ʻike ʻole ʻia mai. | And at early daybreak the door of the house was opened for him and he went out without being seen. |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.8 sent.2 | I ia manawa, kauoha aʻela ke aliʻi i nā luna o ka heiau, a kau aku i ka makāula ma ka lele i mua o ke kuahu. | Then the chief commanded the head man of the temple to ... lay the prophet on the place of sacrifice before the altar. |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.9 sent.1 | A lohe ka makāula i kēia mea ma kahi kaʻawale aku, a ma ia pō iho, lawe akula ʻo ia hoʻokahi pū maiʻa, ua wahī ʻia i ke kapa, me he kupapaʻu lā, a hoʻokomo ʻia i loko o kahi i hoʻopaʻa ʻia ai ua makāula nei, a hoʻi akula a hui me kāna mau kaikamāhine, a haʻi akula i kēia mau mea a me kona pilikia ʻana. | Now the seer heard this command from some distance away, and in the night he took a banana plant covered with tapa like a human figure and put it inside the place where he had been imprisoned, and went back and joined his daughters and told them all about his troubles. |
| Ch.26 p.137 para.9 sent.2 | A kokoke i ka lā kauila o ka heiau, lawe aʻela ka makāula iā Lāʻieikawai a me kona mau hoa pū ma luna o nā waʻa. | And near the day of sacrifice at the temple, the seer took Laieikawai and her companions on board of the double canoe. |
| Ch.26 p.138 para.1 sent.2 | A kokoke i ka hola e kau ʻia ai ke kanaka ma ka lele, ʻākoakoa aʻe nā mea a pau a me ke aliʻi pū. | And close to the hour when the man was to be laid upon the altar all the people assembled and the chief with them; |
| Ch.26 p.138 para.4 sent.2 | I ia manawa hoʻi e hoʻokolokolo ʻia ana nā luna o ke aliʻi, hiki maila ua makāula nei me kāna mau kaikamāhine ma luna o ke kaulua, a lana ma waho o ka nuku o ka muliwai. | While the chief's keepers were being examined, the seer arrived with his daughters in a double canoe and floated outside the mouth of the inlet. |
| Ch.26 p.138 para.4 sent.3 | Kū maila ka makāula ma kekahi waʻa, a ʻo nā kaikuahine o ʻAiwohikupua ma kekahi waʻa, a ʻo Lāʻieikawai hoʻi i luna o ka pola o nā waʻa kahi i kū mai ai i loko hoʻi o kona pūloʻuloʻu aliʻi kapu. | The seer stood on one canoe and Aiwohikupua's sisters on the other, and Laieikawai stood on the high seat between, under the symbols of a taboo chief. |
| Ch.26 p.138 para.6 sent.5 | I ia manawa, naholo maila nā kānaka a kū ma uka o kahakai, hehi kekahi ma luna o kekahi i ʻike leʻa aku lākou. | Then the men ran in flocks from the land down to the sea beach; one trampled on another in order to see. |
| Ch.26 p.138 para.8 sent.1 | A māmā aʻela ke aliʻi, kauoha aʻela ʻo ia i kona luna e lawe mai i ka makāula me nā kaikamāhine pū mai, i pani ma ka hakahaka o Poliʻahu a me Hinaikamalama. | When the chief recovered he commanded his head man to bring the seer and his daughter to fill the place of Poliahu and Hinaikamalama. |
| Ch.26 p.139 para.1 sent.4 | ʻAʻole naʻe i ʻike hou ʻia ma ia hope iho i Wailua, hoʻi akula lākou a noho i Honopūwaiakua. | nor was he seen again after that at Wailua; they returned and dwelt at Honopuwaiakua. |
| Ch.27 p.141 para.1 sent.1 | Ma kēia mokuna, e kamaʻilio kākou no ke kiʻi ʻana o Kahalaomāpuana iā Kaʻōnohiokalā i kāne hoʻopalau na Lāʻieikawai a me kona hoʻi ʻana mai. | In this chapter we will tell how Kahalaomapuana went to get Kaonohiokala, the Eyeball-of-the-Sun, the betrothed husband of Laieikawai, and of her return. |
| Ch.27 p.141 para.2 sent.1 | A pau ke kauoha a Kahalaomāpuana i kona mau kaikuaʻana, a mākaukau hoʻi kona hele ʻana, ma ka puka ʻana o ka lā, komo aʻela ʻo Kahalaomāpuana i loko o Kihanuilūlūmoku, a ʻau akula ma ka moana a hiki i Keʻalohilani. | After Kahalaomapuana had laid her commands upon her sisters and made preparation for the journey, At the rising of the sun Kahalaomapuana entered inside Kihanuilulumoku and swam through the ocean and came to The Shining Heavens; |
| Ch.27 p.143 para.2 sent.1 | I ia hiki ʻana mai o Mokukelekahiki mā ma ka hale, e moe nei ka moʻo. | As Mokukelekahiki and his companion approached the house where the lizard was sleeping, |
| Ch.27 p.143 para.2 sent.2 | I ia manawa, ʻōlelo akula ʻo Kihanuilūlūmoku (ka moʻo) iā Kahalaomāpuana, “I hiki mai auaneʻi kēia mau kānaka e lele mai nei i o kāua nei, a laila, e luaʻi aku wau iā ʻoe, a kau ma ka āʻī o Kāʻeloikamalama. | then said Kihanuilulumoku to Kahalaomapuana, "When those men get here who are flying toward us, then I will throw you out and land you on Kaeloikamalama's neck, |
| Ch.27 p.143 para.3 sent.1 | ʻAʻole i ʻupuʻupu iho ma hope iho o kā lāua kamaʻilio ʻana, halulu ana ʻo Mokukelekahiki lāua me Kāʻeloikamalama ma ka puka o ka hale. | Not long after, Mokukelekahiki and Kaeloikamalama thundered at the door of the house. |
| Ch.27 p.143 para.4 sent.2 | Ma ia wā, kau maila ka weli iā Kāʻeloikamalama mā, hoʻomaka lāua e holo mai ke alo aku o ua moʻo nei. | Then fear fell upon Kaeloikamalama and his companion, and they started lo run away from before the face of the lizard. |
| Ch.27 p.145 para.7 sent.2 | Mai hele ʻoe ma ka makani, hele ʻoe ma ka lulu, a noho i luna o ka umauma. | then approach not the windward, go to the leeward, and sit upon his breast, |
| Ch.27 p.146 para.2 sent.2 | I hiki mai ke anu ma ou lā, mai makaʻu ʻoe. | if cold comes, do not be afraid. |
| Ch.27 p.146 para.3 sent.5 | I ia manawa, ake akula kēia e komo i ka malu o ka mahina, a ma ke ahiahi, hiki akula ʻo ia i ka malu o ka mahina, manaʻo aʻela kēia, ua komo i ka ʻāina i kapa ʻia ʻo Kahakaekaea. | Then she longed to reach the shadow of the moon, and at evening she came into the shadow of the moon; she knew then that she had entered the land called Kahakaekaea. |
| Ch.27 p.146 para.4 sent.1 | ʻIke akula ʻo ia i kēia hale nui e kū ana, ua pō ihola, hele akula ʻo ia ma ka lulu, aia nō e ala mai ana ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele. | She saw the big house standing, it was then night. She approached to the leeward; lo! Moanalihaikawaokele was still awake; |
| Ch.27 p.146 para.4 sent.2 | Hoʻi maila ʻo ia a ma kahi kaʻawale, e kali ana no ka moe iho e like me ke kuhikuhi a Kāʻeloikamalama. | she waited at a distance for him to go to sleep, as Kaeloikamalama had instructed her. |
| Ch.27 p.146 para.5 sent.1 | A ma ka wanaʻao, hele akula kēia, i luna ke alo o Moanalihaikawaokele, manaʻo aʻela kēia ua hiamoe. | When at dawn she went, Moanalihaikawaokele's face was turned upwards, she knew he was asleep; |
| Ch.27 p.146 para.5 sent.2 | Holokikī akula kēia a paʻa ma ka ʻumiʻumi o ka makua kāne, kāhea ihola e like me ke aʻoaʻo ʻana a Kāʻeloikamalama i hōʻike ʻia ma luna. | she ran quickly and seized her father's beard and called to him in the words taught her by Kaeloikamalama, as shown above. |
| Ch.27 p.147 para.8 sent.2 | ʻĪ akula ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele iā Kahalaomāpuana, “Ua kokoke mai ka lā e maʻi ai ko makuahine, no laila, ma kēia pō, e hele mua ʻoe ma ka hale peʻa, ma laila ʻoe e moe ai. | Said Moanalihaikawaokele, "It is almost time for your mother to come, so to-night, get to the taboo house first and sleep there; |
| Ch.27 p.147 para.8 sent.5 | Ma ia pō iho, hoʻouna akula ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele iā Kahalaomāpuana i loko o ka hale peʻa. | That night Moanalihaikawaokele sent Kahalaomapuana into the house set apart for women. |
| Ch.28 p.149 para.1 sent.1 | Ma ke kakahiaka nui, hiki ana ʻo Laukieleʻula. | Very early in the morning came Laukieleula; |
| Ch.28 p.149 para.1 sent.5 | “ʻO wai ʻoe, e kēia kupu, e kēia kalohe, nāna i komo kuʻu wahi kapu, kahi hiki ʻole i nā mea ʻē aʻe ke komo ma kēia wahi?” | "Who are you, lawless one, mischief-maker, who have entered my taboo house, the place prohibited to any other?" |
| Ch.28 p.149 para.6 sent.2 | Hele nō ʻoe i kakahiaka nui pōʻeleʻele o ka lā ʻapōpō a noho ma ka luawai, kahi āna e hoʻomaʻemaʻe ai iā ia. | to- morrow, early in the morning before daylight, go and sit by the water hole where she washes herself; |
| Ch.28 p.149 para.6 sent.4 | I ʻauʻau kēlā a hoʻi mai ma kapa, ʻaʻole ke kapa, a laila, manaʻo mai ua kiʻi aku au i hoʻi mai ai kēlā i ka hale nei. | when she has bathed and returns for the clothes, they will be gone; then she will think that I have taken them; when she comes to the house, |
| Ch.28 p.151 para.2 sent.2 | Iā ia i hiki aku ai, peʻe ihola ma kahi kokoke i ke kiʻowai, ʻaʻole i ʻupuʻupu iho, hiki ana ka makuahine, a wehe i ke kapa i hoʻohaumia ʻia, a lele akula i loko o ka wai. | When she arrived, she hid close to the water hole; not long after, the mother came, took off her polluted clothes and sprang into the water. |
| Ch.28 p.151 para.3 sent.2 | Ua hoʻokaʻawale mua aʻe ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele iā ia ma ke kaʻawale, ʻo ke kaikamahine wale nō ko ka hale. | Moanalihaikawaokele absented himself and only the daughter remained in
the house. |
| Ch.28 p.151 para.6 sent.2 | ʻApo akula ia i ke kaikamahine a uē akula i ka mea i ʻōlelo ʻia ma ka paukū ma luna aʻe nei. | She embraced the girl and wailed out the words in the line above. |
| Ch.28 p.152 para.6 sent.2 | Ma ia wā, kau akula ʻo Laukieleʻula me Kahalaomāpuana i luna o ka ʻēheu o ua manu nei, ʻo ka lele akula nō ia a hiki iā Awakea, ka mea nāna e wehe ke pani o ka lā, kahi i noho ai ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā. | then Laukieleula and Kahalaomapuana rested upon the bird's wings and it flew and came to Awakea, the Noonday, the one who opens the door of the sun where Kaonohiokala lived. |
| Ch.28 p.153 para.10 sent.4 | ʻAʻohe he mea ma mua ou, a ʻaʻohe nō hoʻi he mea ma hope iho.” | no one came before, none after her." |
| Ch.28 p.154 para.3 sent.1 | “A haʻalele kēlā iā mākou, ukali aku mākou ma hope, pākela loa nō ko mākou kaikunāne i ka huhū, me he mea lā, na mākou i hōʻole kona makemake. | "When he left us, we followed; our brother's rage waxed as if we had denied his wish. |
| Ch.28 p.154 para.4 sent.3 | I neʻe ka ua ma kēia hope iho, a i lanipili, eia nō wau i ʻaneʻi. | and when the rain falls and floods the land, I am still here. |
| Ch.28 p.154 para.4 sent.7 | Ua pau kuʻu kino kapu akua, a laila, ʻo kuʻu kapu aliʻi koe, a laila, noho kanaka aku au ma ko kākou ʻano. | my divine body is laid aside, only the nature of a taboo chief remains, and I am become a human being like you. |
| Ch.28 p.154 para.5 sent.1 | “Ma ia hope iho, hoʻolohe mai ʻoukou, a i kuʻi ka hekili, ua ka ua, kaikoʻo ka moana, he waikahe ma ka ʻāina, ʻōlapa ka uila, uhi ka noe, piʻo ke ānuenue, kū ka pūnohu i ka moana, hoʻokahi malama e poʻi ai ka ʻino a mao aʻe, aia wau ma ke kua o nā mauna i ka wā mōlehulehu o ke kakahiaka. | "After this, hearken, and when the thunder rolls, the rain pours down, the ocean swells, the land is flooded, the lightning flashes, a mist overhangs, a rainbow arches, a colored cloud rises on the ocean, for one month bad weather closes down, when the storm clears, there I am behind the mountain in the shadow of the dawn. |
| Ch.28 p.155 para.1 sent.2 | Aia ko kākou hālāwai i ka ʻehu ahiahi, ma ka puka ʻana mai o ka mahina i ka pō i o Māhealani, a laila e hui ai au me kuʻu wahine. | our meeting shall be in the dusk of evening, when the moon rises on the night of full moon; then I will meet my wife. |
| Ch.28 p.155 para.1 sent.3 | Aia a hoʻāo māua, a laila, e hoʻomaka wau i ka luku ma luna o ka ʻāina no ka poʻe i hana ʻino mai iā ʻoukou. | "After our marriage, then I will bring destruction over the earth upon those who have done you wrong. |
| Ch.28 p.155 para.2 sent.1 | A pau kēia mau mea, hoʻi ihola ʻo ia ma ke ala āna i piʻi aku ai, hoʻokahi malama, a hālāwai ihola me Kihanuilūlūmoku, haʻi akula i ka huaʻōlelo, “Ua pono kāua, ua waiwai nō hoʻi.” | These words ended, she returned by the same way that she had climbed up, and within one month found Kihanuilulumoku and told all briefly, "We are all right; we have prospered." |
| Ch.28 p.155 para.2 sent.2 | Komo aʻela ʻo ia i loko o Kihanuilūlūmoku, ʻau akula ma ka moana e like me nā lā o ka hele ʻana aku, pēlā nō ka lōʻihi o ka hoʻi ʻana mai. | She entered into Kihanuilulumoku and swam over the ocean; as many days as they were in going, so many were they in returning. |
| Ch.28 p.155 para.4 sent.3 | Akā, ma kona ʻano makāula, ua hoʻopau ʻia kona makaʻu. | but because he was a prophet, he stilled his fear. |
| Ch.29 p.157 para.2 sent.4 | Ma ona lā i hāʻawi ʻia ai ka mana nui hiki ʻole iā mākou, a ʻo Kahalaomāpuana nei, ʻalua wale nō mea i hāʻawi ʻia ai ka mana, koe aku naʻe ke kapu no ko kākou kaikunāne, no laila, mai makaʻu ʻoe. | to him was given superhuman powers which we have not, except Kahalaomapuana; only they two were given this power; his taboo rank still remains; therefore, do not fear; |
| Ch.29 p.157 para.3 sent.1 | Ma mua aku naʻe o ko Kahalaomāpuana hoʻi ʻana mai Keʻalohilani mai, ua ʻike mua akula ka makāula hoʻokahi malama ma mua aku o ko lāua hoʻi ʻana mai, no laila, wānana mua ka makāula, me ka ʻōlelo iho, “E loaʻa ana ka pōmaikaʻi iā kākou mai ka lewa mai. | Now, before Kahalaomapuana's return from Kealohilani, the seer foresaw what was to take place, one month before her return. Then the seer prophesied, in these words: "A blessing descends upon us from the heavens |
| Ch.29 p.157 para.3 sent.3 | Aia a lohe aku kākou i ka hekili kuʻi pāmaloʻo a me ka hekili i loko o ke kuāua, i ia manawa e ʻike ai ko ka ʻāina nei, he ua me ka uila, he kaikoʻo ma ka moana, he waikahe ma ka ʻāina, uhi paʻa ʻia ka ʻāina a me ka moana a puni e ka noe, ke ʻawa, ka ʻohu a me ke kualau. | "When we hear the thunder peal in dry weather and in wet, then we shall see over the earth rain and lightning, billows swell on the ocean, freshets on the land, land and sea covered thick with fog, fine mist and rain, and the beating of the ocean rain. |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.1 sent.1 | “A hala aʻe ia, a i ka lā ʻo Māhealani, ma ka ʻehu kakahiaka, i ka manawa e keʻehi iho ai nā kukuna o ka lā i ka piko o nā mauna, i ia manawa e ʻike aku ai ko ka ʻāina, he kama kahi ke noho mai ana i loko o ka ʻōnohi o ka lā; he mea like me ke keiki kapu a kuʻu akua. | "When this passes, on the day of full moon, in the dusk of the early morning, at the time when the sun's rays strike the mountain tops, then the earth shall behold a youth sitting within the eye of the sun, one like the taboo child of my god. |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.1 sent.2 | E ʻike auaneʻi ka ʻāina i ka luku nui ma ia hope iho, a nāna e kāʻili aku i ka poʻe hoʻokiʻekiʻe mai ka ʻāina aku, a laila, no kākou ka pōmaikaʻi a me kā kākou pua aku.” | Afterwards the earth shall behold a great destruction and shall see all the haughty snatched away out of the land; then we shall be blessed, and our seed." |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.1 sent.3 | A lohe kāna mau kaikamāhine i kēia wānana a ka makāula, nalu ihola lākou i loko o lākou iho ma ke kaʻawale i kēia wānana a ka makāula, me ka haʻi ʻole aku i ua makāula nei, no ka mea, ua hoʻomanaʻo wale aʻela lākou no kā lākou mea i hoʻouna ai i ko lākou kaikaina. | When his daughters heard the seer's prophecy, they wondered within themselves that he should prophesy at this distance, without knowing anything about their sister's mission for which they waited. |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.2 sent.1 | Ma kona ʻano makāula, ua hiki iā ia ke hele aku e kūkala ma Kauaʻi a puni, me ka haʻi aku i kāna mea i ʻike, a no nā mea e hiki mai ana ma hope. | As a prophet it was his privilege to proclaim about Kauai those things which he saw would come to pass. |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.2 sent.2 | A no kēia mea, kauoha ihola i kāna mau kaikamāhine, ma mua o kona haʻalele ʻana iā lākou, me ka ʻōlelo aku, “E aʻu mau kaikamāhine, ke hele nei au ma kuʻu ʻaoʻao mau. | So, before leaving his daughters, he commanded them and said, "My daughters. I am giving you my instructions before leaving you, |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.2 sent.5 | No laila, e noho ʻoukou ma kahi a kuʻu akua i kuhikuhi ai iaʻu. | Therefore, dwell here in this place, which my god has pointed out to me, |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.2 sent.7 | Hele akula ua makāula nei e like me kona manaʻopaʻa, a hele akula ʻo ia i mua o nā aliʻi a me ka poʻe koʻikoʻi ma kahi e ʻākoakoa ai nā aliʻi. | The prophet went away, as he had determined, and he went into the presence of the chiefs and men of position, at the place where the chiefs were assembled; |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.2 sent.8 | Ma laila ʻo ia i kūkala aku ai e like me kona ʻike. | there he proclaimed what he had seen. |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.3 sent.1 | A hiki mua ʻo ia i o ʻAiwohikupua, me ka ʻī aku, “Mai kēia lā aku, e kūkulu mua ʻoe i mau lepa a puni kou wahi, a e hoʻokomo i kāu poʻe aloha a pau ma loko, no ka mea, ma kēia hope koke iho, e hiki mai ana ka luku ma luna o ka ʻāina. | And first he came to Aiwohikupua and said, "From this day, erect flag signals around your dwelling, and bring inside all whom you love. "For there comes shortly a destruction over the earth; |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.3 sent.2 | ʻAʻole e ʻike ʻia kekahi luku ma mua aku e like me ka luku e hiki mai ana, ʻaʻole hoʻi ma hope iho o ka pau ʻana aʻe o kēia luku aʻu e ʻōlelo nei. | never has any destruction been seen before like this which is to come; never
will any come hereafter when this destruction of which I tell is ended. |
| Ch.29 p.158 para.4 sent.1 | “Ma mua o ka hiki ʻana mai o ka mea mana, e hōʻike mai nō ʻo ia i hōʻailona no ka luku ʻana, ʻaʻole ma luna o nā makaʻāinana, ma luna pono iho nō ou, a ʻo kou poʻe. | "Before the coming of the wonder-worker he will give you a sign of destruction, not over all the people of the land, but over you yourself and your people; |
| Ch.29 p.159 para.5 sent.1 | A no kēia ʻōlelo a Waka, hāliu akula ka makāula i ke aliʻi, a ʻōlelo akula, “Mai hoʻolohe i kā ko kupuna wahine, no ka mea, e hiki mai ana ka luku nui ma luna o nā aliʻi. | And at Waka's words the seer turned to the chiefs and said, "Do not listen to your grandmother, for a great destruction is coming over the chiefs. |
| Ch.29 p.159 para.5 sent.4 | A hiki i ua lā lā, e moe ana nā luāhine ma nā kapuaʻi o ke keiki mana, me ke noi aku i ola, ʻaʻole e loaʻa, no ka mea, ua hōʻole i ka ʻōlelo a ka makāula nei.” | "When that day comes, the old women will lie down before the soles of the feet of that mighty youth, and plead for life, and not get it, because they have disbelieved the words of the prophet." |
| Ch.29 p.159 para.6 sent.3 | Hoʻokahi lā o kona noho ʻana me kāna mau kaikamāhine ma Honopuʻuwaiakua, mai kona hoʻi ʻana aku mai kaʻapuni, hiki mai ʻo Kahalaomāpuana e like me kā kākou ʻike ʻana ma mua aʻe nei i hōʻike ʻia ma nēia mokuna. | He had been back one day with his daughters at Honopuwaiakua when Kahalaomapuana arrived, as described in the chapter before. |
| Ch.30 p.161 para.1 sent.1 | Hoʻokahi anahulu ma hope iho o ko Kahalaomāpuana hoʻi ʻana mai mai Keʻalohilani mai, i ia manawa, hiki maila ka hōʻailona mua a ko lākou kaikunāne e like me ke kauoha i kona kaikuahine. | Ten days after Kahalaomapuana's return from Kealohilani came the first of their brother's promised signs. |
| Ch.30 p.161 para.2 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula nā kaikamāhine, “ʻO ia hoʻi kā mākou i hamumu iho nei, no ka mea, ua lohe mua nō mākou i kēia mea iā ʻoe, ʻoiai, ʻaʻole kēia (Kahalaomāpuana) i hiki mai, a ma kā ia nei hoʻi ʻana mai nei, lohe hope mākou iā ia nei.” | The daughters answered, ''This is what we have been whispering about, for first you told us these things while Kahalaomapuana had not yet returned, and since her return she has told us the same thing again." |
| Ch.30 p.161 para.4 sent.3 | E hiki mai ana ka pōmaikaʻi iā kākou, a e lilo auaneʻi kākou i mea nui nāna e ʻai nā moku a puni, ʻaʻole kekahi mea ʻē aʻe, a e noho aliʻi auaneʻi ʻoukou ma luna o ka ʻāina a e holo aku ka poʻe hana ʻino mai iā ʻoukou mai ka noho aliʻi aku. | we shall prosper and become mighty ones among the islands round about; none shall be above us; and you shall rule over the land, and those who have done evil against you shall flee from you and be chiefs no more. |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.1 sent.1 | Hoʻokahi malama o ka ʻino ma ka ʻāina no ka hōʻailona hope. | One month of bad weather over the land as the last sign; |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.1 sent.2 | Ma ke kakahiaka, i nā kukuna o ka lā i haʻalele iho ai i nā mauna, ʻike ʻia akula ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā e noho ana i loko o ka wela kūkanono o ka lā ma waena pono o ka luakālai i hoʻopuni ʻia i nā ānuenue a me ka ua koko. | in the early morning when the rays of the sun rose above the mountain, Kaonohiokala was seen sitting within the smoking heat of the sun, right in the middle of the sun's ring, encircled with rainbows and a red mist. |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.5 sent.1 | Ma ka ʻehu ahiahi, ma ka puka ʻana mai a ka mahina kōnane ʻo Māhealani, hiki maila i loko o ke anapuni a ka makāula. | In the dusk of the evening, at the rising of the bright full moon, he entered the prophet's inclosure. |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.8 sent.1 | “ʻAʻole au i hiki mai e lawe i kou ola, akā, ma ka huakaʻi a kuʻu kaikuahine i hiki aʻe nei i ou lā, a no laila, ua hāʻawi mai wau i hōʻailona noʻu e ʻike ai iā ʻoe, a e maopopo ai iaʻu, ʻo ʻoe kuʻu wahine hoʻopalau. | "I have not come to take your life, but on my sister's visit to me I gave her a sign for me to know you by and recognize you as my betrothed wife; |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.10 sent.1 | I ia manawa, kāhea ihola ʻo ia i kona mau kaikuahine, “Ke lawe nei wau i kuʻu wahine, a ma kēia pō e hiki hou mai māua,” a laila, kāʻili ʻia akula kāna wahine me ka ʻike ʻole ʻia e kona mau hoa. | Then he called to his sisters, "I take my wife and at this time of the night will come again hither." Then his wife was caught away out of sight of her companions, |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.10 sent.2 | Akā, ʻo ka makāula ka mea i ʻike ʻāweʻaweʻa aku i ka lawe ʻia ʻana ma ke ānuenue, a noho i loko o ka mahina. | but the prophet had a glimpse of her being carried on the rainbow to dwell within the moon; |
| Ch.30 p.163 para.10 sent.3 | Ma laila i hōʻoiaʻiʻo ai lāua i ko lāua mau minuke ʻoluʻolu. | there they took in pledge their moments of bliss. |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.1 sent.1 | A ma kekahi pō aʻe, i ka mahina e kōnane ʻoluʻolu ana, i ka wā hapa o ka laʻi, kuʻu ʻia maila kekahi ānuenue i ʻūlili ʻia mai luna mai o ka mahina a hiki i lalo nei i ka wā e kūpono ana ka mahina i luna pono o Honopuʻuwaiakua. | And the next night when the moon shone bright, at the time when its light decreased, a rainbow was let down, fastened to the moon and reaching to the earth; when the moon was directly over Honopuwaiakua, |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.1 sent.2 | I ia manawa, iho maila nā aliʻi o ka lewa me ko lāua ʻihiʻihi nui, a kū maila i mua o ka makāula, me ka ʻōlelo iho, “E hele aʻe ʻoe e kala aku i nā mea a pau, i hoʻokahi anahulu, e hoʻohui ʻia ma kahi hoʻokahi. | then the chiefs appeared above in the sky in their majesty and stood before the prophet, saying: "Go and summon all the people for ten days to gather together in one place; |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.6 sent.1 | A i ke kakahiaka o kekahi lā aʻe, ma ka puka ʻana mai o ka lā, i ka wā i haʻalele iho ai nā kukuna wela o ka lā i nā mauna, i ia manawa ka hoʻomaka ʻana o ka hiwahiwa e hoʻopaʻi iā ʻAiwohikupua a me Waka pū. | And in the morning of the next day, at sunrise, when the hot rays of the sun rose over the mountains, Then the Beloved began to punish Aiwohikupua and Waka. |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.6 sent.2 | Hāʻawi ʻia ka make no Waka, a ʻo ʻAiwohikupua, hoʻopaʻi ʻia akula ia e lilo i kanaka ʻilihune e ʻaeʻa haukaʻe ana ma luna o ka ʻāina a hiki i kona mau lā hope. | To Waka he meted out death, and Aiwohikupua was punished by being deprived of all his wealth, to wander like a vagrant over the earth until the end of his days. |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.6 sent.3 | Ma ke noi a Lāʻieikawai e hoʻopakele iā Lāʻielohelohe a me kāna kāne, no laila, ua māʻalo aʻe ka pilikia mai o lāua aʻe, a no lāua kekahi kuleana ma ka ʻāina ma ia hope iho. | At the Request of Laieikawai to spare Laielohelohe and her husband, the danger passed them by, and they became rulers over the land thereafter. |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.7 sent.1 | I ke kakahiaka naʻe, i ka hoʻomaka ʻana o ka luku iā ʻAiwohikupua a me Waka, aia hoʻi, ʻo ke anaina i ʻākoakoa ma Pihanakalani, ʻike akula lākou i ke ānuenue i kuʻu ʻia mai ma ka mahina mai, i ʻūlili ʻia i nā kukuna wela o ka lā. | Now in the early morning of the day of Aiwohikupua's and Waka's downfall, Lo! the multitude assembled at Pihanakalani saw a rainbow let down from the moon to earth, trembling in the hot rays of the sun. |
| Ch.30 p.165 para.8 sent.1 | A laila, i ia manawa ʻākoakoa lākou a pau, ka makāula a me nā kaikamāhine ʻelima, e kau mai ana ma ke ala i ʻūlili ʻia, a ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā me Lāʻieikawai ma ke kaʻawale, a he mau kapuaʻi ko lāua me he ahi lā. | Then, as they all crowded together, the seer and the five girls stood on the ladder way, and Kaonohiokala and Laieikawai apart, and the soles of their feet were like fire. |
| Ch.30 p.166 para.9 sent.1 | A pau ka hoʻopaʻi a ke aliʻi no nā ʻenemi, hoʻonoho aʻela ke aliʻi o luna iā Kahalaomāpuana i mōʻī, a hoʻonoho pākahi akula i nā kaikuahine ona ma nā mokupuni. | When the chief had avenged them upon their enemies, the chief placed Kahalaomapuana as ruler over them and stationed his other sisters over separate islands. |
| Ch.30 p.166 para.9 sent.2 | A ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā nō ke kuhina nui a me Lāʻielohelohe, a ʻo ka makāula nō ko lākou mau hoa kūkā ma ke ʻano kuhina nui. | And Kekalukaluokewa was chief counsellor under Laielohelohe, and the seer was their companion in council, with the power of chief counsellor". |
| Ch.30 p.166 para.10 sent.1 | A pau ka hoʻoponopono ʻana no kēia mau mea, a pono ka noho ʻana, kāʻili pū ʻia akula ʻo Lāʻieikawai e kāna kāne ma ke ānuenue i loko o nā ao kaʻalelewa, a noho ma kahi mau o kāna kāne. | After all these things were put in order and well established, Laieikawai and her husband were taken on the rainbow to the land within the clouds and dwelt in the husband's home. |
| Ch.30 p.166 para.10 sent.3 | Akā, ʻaʻole i loaʻa ka hewa o kona mau kaikuahine ma ia hope iho a hiki i ka haʻalele ʻana i kēia ao. | But there was no fault to be found with his sisters until they left this world. |
| Ch.31 p.167 para.1 sent.1 | Ma hope o ko Lāʻieikawai hoʻāo ʻana me Kaʻōnohiokala me ka hoʻoponopono i ka noho ʻana o kona mau kaikuahine, ka makāula a me Kekalukaluokēwā ma, a pau kēia mau mea i ka hoʻoponopono ʻia, hoʻi akula lāua i luna o ka ʻaina i ʻōlelo ʻia ʻo Kahakaekaea, a noho ma ka peʻa kapu o Kūkulu o Tahiti. | After the marriage of Laieikawai and Kaonohiokala, when his sisters and the seer and Kekalukaluokewa and his wife were well established, after all this had been set in order, they returned to the country in the heavens called Kahakaekaea and dwelt in the taboo house on the borders of Tahiti. |
| Ch.31 p.167 para.1 sent.2 | A no ka lilo ʻana o Lāʻieikawai i wahine mau ma ka pelika paʻa, no laila, haʻawi ʻia aʻela ia ia kekahi mau hana mana a pau ma ke ʻano akua e like me kana kane, koe naʻe ka mana hiki ʻole ke ʻike i na mea huna a me na hana pohihihi i hana ʻia ma kahi mamao; no kana kane wale nō. | And when she became wife under the marriage bond, all power was given her as a god except that to see hidden things and those obscure deeds which were done at a distance; only her husband had this power. |
| Ch.31 p.167 para.2 sent.1 | Ma mua naʻe o ko lāua haʻalele ʻana ia Kauaʻi a hoʻi aku i luna, ua hana ʻia kekahi ʻōlelo hoʻoholo i loko o ko lākou ʻakoakoa ʻana ma ka ʻahaʻōlelo hoʻoponopono aupuni ʻana, ʻo ia hoʻi, i ka la i kuʻu ʻia mai ai ke alanui anuenue mai Nuʻumealani mai, a kau akula ʻo Kaʻōnohiokala a me āʻieikawai ma luna o ke ala anuenue i ʻōlelo ʻia, a waiho maila i kona kauoha hope i kona mau hoa, ka makāula a me Lāʻielohelohe, eia kana ʻōlelo, “E oʻu mau hoa a me ko kakou makua kane makāula, kuʻu kaikaina i ka aʻa hoʻokahi a me ka kaua kane, ke hoʻi nei au ma muli o ka mea a kakou i kūka ai, a ke haʻalele nei wau ia ʻoukou, a hoʻi aku i kahi hiki ʻole ia ʻoukou ke ʻike koke aʻe. | Before they left Kauai to return to the heavens, a certain agreement was made in their assembly at the government council. Lo! on that day, the rainbow pathway was let down from
Nuumealani and Kaonohiokala and Laieikawai mounted upon that way, and she laid her last commands upon her sisters, the seer, and Laielohelohe; these were her words: "My companions and our father the prophet, my sister born with me in the womb and your husband, I return according to our agreement; I leave you and return to that place where you will not soon come to see me; |
| Ch.31 p.168 para.1 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻieikawai ma ko lāua wahi me kāna kāne, he mea mau iā Kaʻōnohiokalā ka iho pinepine mai i lalo nei e ʻike i ka pono o kona mau kaikuahine a me kāna wahine ʻōpio (Lāʻielohelohe); ʻekolu iho ʻana i ka makahiki hoʻokahi. | "While Laieikawai lived at home with her husband it was Kaonohiokala's custom to come down from time to time to look after his sisters' welfare and that of his young wife three times every year. |
| Ch.31 p.168 para.1 sent.2 | ʻElima paha makahiki ka lōʻihi o ko lāua noho ʻana ma ka hoʻohiki paʻa o ka pelika male, a i ke ono paha o ka makahiki o ko Lāʻieikawai mā noho pono ʻana me kāna kāne, i ia manawa, hāʻule ihola ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā i ka hewa me Lāʻielohelohe me ka ʻike ʻole o nā mea ʻē aʻe i kēia hāʻule ʻana i ka hewa. | They had lived perhaps five years under the marriage contract, and about the sixth year of Laieikawai's happy life with her husband, Kaonohiokala fell into sin with Laielohelohe without
knowing of his falling into sin. |
| Ch.31 p.168 para.3 sent.2 | Akā, ma kona ʻano keiki akua, hoʻomanawanui akula nō ʻo ia e pale aʻe i kona kuko. | but by his nature as a child of god he persisted in checking his lust; |
| Ch.31 p.168 para.4 sent.1 | I ka lima o ka makahiki, ma ka pau ʻana o ka hapahā mua o ua makahiki lā, iho hou maila ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā i kāna hana mau i lalo nei. | In the fifth year, at the end of the first quarter, Kaonohiokala went away to do his work below. |
| Ch.31 p.169 para.1 sent.3 | A no ko Kahalaomāpuana ʻae ʻole, hoʻopuka akula ʻo ia i kāna ʻōlelo i mua o kona kaikunāne, “E kuʻu Lani, ma kou hoʻolilo ʻana aʻe nei iā mākou e hoʻi i Keʻalohilani, a ʻo lākou nō ke hoʻi, a ʻo wau nei lā, e noho aʻe nō wau i lalo nei e like me kāu hoʻonoho mua ʻana, no ka mea, ke aloha nei wau i ka ʻāina a me nā makaʻāinana, a ua maʻa aʻe nei nō hoʻi ka noho ʻana. | And in refusing, she spoke to her brother as follows: "My high one, as to your sending us to Kealohilani, let them go and I will remain here, living as you first placed me; for I love the land and the people and am accustomed to the life; |
| Ch.31 p.169 para.1 sent.4 | A inā ʻo wau nō ma lalo nei, ʻo ʻoe nō ma luna mai, a ʻo lākou nei hoʻi i waena aʻe nei, a laila, pono iho nō kākou, like loa me ka hānau ʻana mai a ko kākou makuahine, no ka mea, nāu i wāhi ke alanui, a ʻo kou mau pōkiʻi hoʻi, hele aku ma hope ou, a naʻu hoʻi i pani aku. | and if I stay below here and you above and they between, then all will be well, just as we were born of our mother; for you broke the way, your little sisters followed you, and I stopped it up; |
| Ch.31 p.169 para.2 sent.5 | E hele ʻoukou ma ke kaʻawale kekahi i kekahi. | every one by herself, |
| Ch.31 p.169 para.2 sent.8 | Hele akula kēlā a me kēia o lākou ma ke kaʻawale, a hoʻi maila e like me ka mea i ʻōlelo ʻia iā lākou. | Every one went separately and returned as they had been told. |
| Ch.31 p.169 para.3 sent.5 | A ʻo Kahalaomāpuana hoʻi, ʻaʻole ʻo ia i huhuki mai ma ke kiliʻoʻopu loloa, huhuki maila ʻo ia ma ka mea liʻiliʻi loa, ʻekolu kapuaʻi paha kona loa, a ʻoki aʻela ʻo ia i ka hapalua o kāna, a hoʻi akula, me ka manaʻo, ʻo kāna kiliʻoʻopu ka pōkole. | and Kahalaomapuana did not pull the tall flowers, she pulled a very short one, about three feet long hers was, and she cut off half and came back, thinking her grass stem was the shortest. |
| Ch.31 p.170 para.5 sent.6 | No laila, e pule ʻoukou i ke akua, a e pule nō hoʻi wau i koʻu akua, a inā i mana nā pule a kākou, a laila, e hālāwai hou ana nō kākou ma kēia hope aku. | now, therefore, do you pray to your god and I will pray to my god, and if our prayer has might, then shall we meet again hereafter. |
| Ch.31 p.170 para.5 sent.10 | A laila, lālau aʻela ʻo ia i kona ʻaʻahu, a pālulu aʻela i kona mau maka i mua o ke anaina i mea e hūnā ai i kona mānaʻonaʻo i nā makaʻāinana a me ka ʻāina, a lawe ʻia akula ʻo ia ma ke ānuenue i loko o nā ao kaʻalelewa ma ka lani kua kaʻa. | Then she caught hold of her garment and held it up to her eyes before the assembly to hide her feeling for the people and the land. And she was borne by the rainbow to the land above the clouds, to Lanikuakaa, the heavens higher up. |
| Ch.31 p.171 para.1 sent.2 | He ʻike hiki he hana ʻia kekahi hana ma kahi malū, a he kaikamahine manaʻopaʻa nō, ʻaʻole e hoʻopilimeaʻai, o manaʻo auaneʻi ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā, o haʻi ʻia kāna hana kalohe ʻana i mua o Moanalihaikawaokele, no laila ʻo ia i hoʻokaʻawale ai i kona kaikuahine. | who could see things done in secret; and she was a resolute girl, not one to give in. Kaonohiokala thought she might disclose to Moanalihaikawaokele this evil doing;
so he got his sister away, |
| Ch.31 p.171 para.1 sent.3 | A ma ke ʻano akua o Kaʻōnohiokalā, ua lilo ka hailona iā Kahalaomāpuana. | and by his supernatural arts he made the lot fall to Kahalaomapuana. |
| Ch.31 p.171 para.2 sent.2 | ʻAʻole naʻe ʻo ia i hoʻokō koke i ia manawa, akā, i mea e pono ai ʻo ia i mua o Kekalukaluokēwā, no laila, waiho akula ʻo ia i mua o Kekalukaluokēwā e pani ma ka hakahaka o Kahalaomāpuana, a ʻo ka makāula nō kona kuhina nui, a hoʻonoho ʻia akula ʻo Mailehaʻiwale i kiaʻāina paha no Kauaʻi, iā Mailekaluhea no Oʻahu, ʻo Mailelauliʻi no Maui a me nā moku ʻē aʻe; iā Mailepākaha no Hawaiʻi. | Not just at that time, but he made things right with Kekalukaluokewa by putting him in Kahalaomapuana's place and the seer as his chief counsellor. Mailehaiwale was made governor on Kauai, Mailekaluhea on Oahu, Mailelaulii on Maui and the other islands, Mailepakaha on Hawaii. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.1 sent.1 | A lilo aʻela ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā i poʻo kiʻekiʻe ma ke aupuni, a laila, hoʻouna akula ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā iā Kekalukaluokēwā e hele e kaʻapuni ma nā mokupuni a pau e lawelawe i kāna ʻoihana mōʻī, a hoʻonoho ihola iā Lāʻielohelohe ma ko Kekalukaluokēwā wahi ma ke ʻano hope mōʻī. | When Kekalukaluokewa became head over the group, then Kaonohiokala sent him to make a tour of the islands and perform the functions of a ruler, and he put Laielohelohe in Kekalukaluokewa's place as his substitute. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.1 sent.2 | A no kēia mea, lawe aʻela ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā i kona kuhina nui (ka makāula), ma kāna huakaʻi kaʻapuni. | And for this reason Kekalukaluokewa took his chief counsellor (the prophet) with him on the circuit. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.2 sent.1 | I ka lā i haʻalele ai ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā iā Pihanakalani, a hele akula ma kāna ʻoihana kaʻapuni, i ia lā nō hoʻi ka haʻalele ʻana o Kaʻōnohiokalā iā lalo nei. | So Kekalukaluokewa left Pihanakalani and started on the business of visiting the group; the same day Kaonohiokala left those below. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.2 sent.2 | Ma kēlā hoʻi ʻana ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā, ʻaʻole naʻe ʻo ia i hiki loa i luna, akā, ua ʻike naʻe ʻo ia i ia lā e holo ana nā waʻa o Kekalukaluokēwā i ka moana, a no ia mea, hoʻi hou maila ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā mai luna mai a hiki i lalo nei, a launa ihola me Lāʻielohelohe; ʻaʻole naʻe i hana ʻia ka hewa i ia manawa. | When Kaonohiokala started to return he did not go all the way up, but just watched that day the sailing of Kekalukaluokewa's canoes over the ocean. Then Kaonohiokala came back down and sought the companionship of Laielohelohe, but not just then was the sin committed. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.3 sent.1 | Iā lāua me Lāʻielohelohe e hālāwai lā, noi akula ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā iā Lāʻielohelohe e hoʻokaʻawale ʻia nā mea ʻē aʻe, a ma kona ʻano mea nui, ua hoʻokaʻawale ʻia ko ke aliʻi wahine mau ʻaialo. | When the two met, Kaonohiokala asked Laielohelohe to separate herself from the rest, and at the high chief's command the princess's retainers withdrew. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.3 sent.2 | Iā Lāʻielohelohe me Kaʻōnohiokalā, ʻo lāua wale nō ma ke kaʻawale, ʻī akula, “ʻO ka ʻekolu kēia o koʻu mau makahiki (puni) o ka makemake ʻana iā ʻoe, no ka mea, ua ulu kou nani a pāpale ma luna o kou kaikuaʻana (Lāʻieikawai). | When Laielohelohe and Kaonohiokala were alone he said, "This is the third year that I have desired you, for your beauty has grown and overshadowed your sister's, Laieikawai's. |
| Ch.32 p.173 para.3 sent.3 | A no laila, ma nā lā hope nei, ua hiki ʻole iaʻu ke hoʻomanawanui e pale aku i ke kuko noʻu iā ʻoe mai ou aku.” | Now at last my patience no longer avails to turn away my passion from you." |
| Ch.32 p.174 para.2 sent.1 | ʻĪ akula ʻo Lāʻielohelohe, “ʻAʻole kāua e launa kino, e kuʻu Lani, no ka mea, ʻo ka mea nāna i mālama iaʻu mai kuʻu wā ʻuʻuku mai a loaʻa wale kuʻu kāne, nāna ka ʻōlelo paʻa ma oʻu lā, ʻaʻole e hāʻawi i kuʻu kino me kahi mea ʻē aʻe e hoʻohaumia. | Said Laielohelohe, "We can not touch one another, my high one, for the one who brought me up from the time I was born until I found my husband, he has strictly bound me not to defile my flesh with anyone; |
| Ch.32 p.174 para.4 sent.4 | A no laila, kiʻi mai nei wau ma ou lā.” | and so I have come to you." |
| Ch.32 p.174 para.5 sent.1 | ʻĪ aku ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa, “E ka lani o nā lani, ke ʻae aku nei wau ma kāu noi, e kuʻu Lani. | Said Kapukaihaoa: "High one of the highest, I grant your request, my high one; |
| Ch.32 p.174 para.6 sent.1 | A pau kēia mau kamaʻilio a lāua ma ke kaʻawale, hele akula ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa me ke aliʻi pū a hiki i o Lāʻielohelohe lā, ʻī akula, “E kuʻu luhi, eia ke kāne. | At the end of their secret conference, Kapukaihaoa went with the chief to Laielohelohe. Said he, "My ward, here is the husband, |
| Ch.32 p.174 para.6 sent.5 | ʻEkolu mau lā o lāua ma kā lāua mau hana, hoʻi akula ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā i Kahakaekaea. | Three days after, Kaonohiokala returned to Kahakaekaea. |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.1 sent.1 | A ma hope iho o ia mau lā kaʻawale, ua ʻaʻaki paʻa ʻia ke aloha wela i luna o Kaʻōnohiokalā, a ʻano ʻē kona mau helehelena. | And after he had been some days absent, the pangs of love caught him fast, and changed his usual appearance. |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.4 sent.3 | Akā, ʻo Lāʻielohelohe, ʻaʻole i loaʻa iā ia kona pilikia ma ka manaʻo, he aha lā i ia mea i kona manaʻo ʻana! | But Laielohelohe never thought of harm; what was that to her mind! |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.5 sent.1 | Iā lāua e hui ana ma ka makemake o ke aliʻi kāne, i ia manawa, ua ʻike ʻole ʻo Lāʻielohelohe i kona aloha iā Kaʻōnohiokalā, no ka mea, ʻaʻole nō ʻo ke aliʻi wahine makemake iki e hana i ka hewa me ke aliʻi nui o luna, aia hoʻi, ma muli o ka ʻonou a kona mea nāna i mālama wale nō ka hoʻokō ʻana. | When they met at the chief's wish, Laielohelohe did not love Kaonohiokala, for the princess did not wish to commit sin with the great chief from the heavens, but to satisfy her guardian's greed. |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.7 sent.1 | I kekahi lā ma ke ahiahi, ʻōlelo akula ʻo Lāʻielohelohe iā Kapūkaʻihaoa, “E kuʻu kahu nāna i mālama maikaʻi, i kēia manawa, ua pōʻino loa iaʻu ka manaʻo no Kaʻōnohiokalā i loko o nā manawa o māua i hana iho nei i ka hewa, a ke hoʻomāhuahua mai nei ke aloha o kuʻu kāne (Kekalukaluokēwā) iaʻu, no ka mea, i ka noho iho nei nō kā i ka pono me ke kāne, me ko māua maikaʻi, a lalau wale nō i ka hewa, ʻaʻole no koʻu makemake, no kou makemake wale nō. | One day in the evening Laielohelohe said to Kapukaihaoa, "My good guard and protector, I am sorry for my sin with Kaonohiokala, and love grows within me for Kekalukaluokewa, my husband; good and happy has been our life together, and I sinned not by my own wish, but through your wish alone. |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.8 sent.1 | ʻĪ aku ʻo Kapūkaʻihaoa, “I ʻae aku au e lilo ʻoe i ka mea ʻē no kuʻu nele i ka haʻawina waiwai o ko kāne, no ka mea, ma kuʻu maka ponoʻī nei nō ka waiwai a ko kāne i hāʻawi aʻe ai, a ʻo wau nō ke kū. | Said Kapukaihaoa, "I allowed you to be another's because your husband gave me no gifts; for in my very face your husband's gifts were given to others; there I stood, |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.9 sent.1 | ʻĪ aku ʻo Lāʻielohelohe i kona kahu nāna i hānai, “Inā ʻo kou kumu ia o ka hāʻawi ʻana i kuʻu kino e hoʻohaumia me Kaʻōnohiokalā, a laila, ua hewa loa ʻoe, no ka mea, ua ʻike ʻoe, ʻaʻole no Kekalukaluokēwā i hoʻonoho nā mea ma luna o nā ʻāina, akā, no Kaʻōnohiokalā nō. | Said Laielohelohe to her foster father, "If that is why you have given me over to sin with Kaonohiokala, then you have done very wrong, for you know the rulers over the islands were not appointed by Kekalukaluokewa, but by Kaonohiokala; |
| Ch.32 p.175 para.9 sent.2 | A no laila, ʻapōpō e kau wau ma luna o nā waʻa, a holo aku e ʻimi i kuʻu kāne.” | and therefore to-morrow I will go on board a double canoe and set sail to seek my husband.'" |
| Ch.32 p.176 para.1 sent.2 | A no ke kumu ʻole o kona manaʻo iā Kaʻōnohiokalā, no laila, hūnā ihola ʻo ia iā ia ma loko o nā hale kuaʻāina hiki ʻole iā ia ke noho, no kona manaʻo, o hiki hou mai ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā, hana hou ʻia ka hewa me kona makemake ʻole kona peʻe ma nā hale kuaʻāina. | And not wishing to meet Kaonohiokala, she hid inside the country people's houses where he would not come, lest Kaonohiokala should come again and sin with her against her wish; so she fled to the country people's houses, |
| Ch.32 p.176 para.2 sent.1 | A hala ʻo Lāʻielohelohe i ka moana, a hiki ma Oʻahu, noho ihola ʻo ia ma nā hale kuaʻāina. | When she sailed, she came to Oahu and stayed in the country people's houses. |
| Ch.32 p.176 para.3 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻielohelohe paha i Oʻahu, a ma kekahi lā aʻe, iho hou maila ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā e launa hou me Lāʻielohelohe, akā, i kona hiki ʻana mai, ʻaʻole ʻo Lāʻielohelohe i ka hale aliʻi. | About the time that Laielohelohe was come to Oahu, that next day Kaonohiokala came again to visit Laielohelohe; but on his arrival, no Laielohelohe at the chief's house; |
| Ch.32 p.176 para.4 sent.1 | Iā ʻAiwohikupua e kuewa ana ma ke aloaliʻi, ʻo ia naʻe kekahi i lohe i kēia mau mea. | Now the vagabond, Aiwohikupua, was one of the chief's retainers, he was the one who heard these things. |
| Ch.32 p.176 para.4 sent.3 | Aia nō a pau ka haumia, a laila, hana aku ma ka hana o ka Hōkū Venuka.” | when the uncleanness is over, then the deeds of Venus may be done." |
| Ch.33 p.177 para.1 sent.1 | Ua ʻōlelo ʻia ma ka mokuna kanakolukumamālua o kēia kaʻao ke kumu o ko Lāʻielohelohe ʻimi ʻana i kāna kāne, iā Kekalukaluokēwā. | In Chapter XXXII of this story the reason was told why Laielohelohe went in search of her husband. |
| Ch.33 p.177 para.2 sent.1 | Holo akula ʻo ia ma nā waʻa a pae ma Honuaʻula, i laila, lohe lākou, ʻo Hinaikamalama ka wahine a Kekalukaluokēwā; ʻaʻole naʻe i ʻike ko Honuaʻula poʻe, ʻo kā Kekalukaluokēwā wahine kēia. | She sailed by canoe and came to Honuaula; there they heard that Hinaikamalama was Kekalukaluokewa's wife; the Honuaula people did not know that this was his wife. |
| Ch.33 p.177 para.2 sent.3 | A laila, hoʻomaopopo ʻia maila ka lohe mua o lākou i Honuaʻula, a ma laila aku lākou a kau nā waʻa ma Kapōhue. | There was substantiated the news they heard first at Honuaula, and there they beached the canoe at Kapohue, |
| Ch.33 p.177 para.2 sent.6 | He nui nā lā i hala iā lākou ma ia hele ʻana. | many days they had been on the way. |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.2 sent.1 | Ma mua naʻe o ko Lāʻielohelohe hālāwai ʻana me Kekalukaluokēwā, ua lohe mua aku ʻo ia i ka hāʻule ʻana o Lāʻielohelohe i ka hewa me Kaʻōnohiokalā. | Before Laielohelohe's meeting, with Kekalukaluokewa he had heard of her falling, into sin with Kaonohiokala; |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.2 sent.2 | I lohe nō i kahi kahu o Kauakahialiʻi, ka mea i lilo ai i kuhina nui ma ka ʻaoʻao o ʻAiwohikupua. | he heard it from one of Kauakahialii's men, the one who became Aiwohikupua's chief counsellor; |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.3 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻielohelohe mā i hiki aku ai ma ka hale a Kekalukaluokēwā e noho ana, aia hoʻi, e hiamoe mai ana lāua ma kahi hoʻokahi; ua hoʻouhi ʻia i ka ʻaʻahu hoʻokahi; e moe ana naʻe i ka ʻona a ka ʻawa. | When Laielohelohe and her companions came to the house where Kekalukaluokewa was staying, lo! they lay sleeping in the same place under one covering, drunk with awa. |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.3 sent.2 | A komo akula ʻo Lāʻielohelohe a noho ihola ma ke poʻo o lāua (Kekalukaluokēwā mā), honi ihola i ka ihu a uē malū ihola i loko ona, akā, ua hoʻohanini ʻia nā māpuna waimaka o Lāʻielohelohe no ka ʻike ʻana iho, he wahine ʻē kā kāna kāne. | Laielohelohe entered and sat down at their head, kissed him and wept quietly over him; but the fountain of her tears overflowed when she saw another woman sleeping by her husband, |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.4 sent.1 | ʻO ia hoʻi, ʻaʻole e hiki iā Lāʻielohelohe ke hoʻomanawanui i kona ukiuki iā Hinaikamalama, no laila, komo akula ʻo ia ma waena o lāua a pale akula iā Hinaikamalama, hoʻohuli maila iā Kekalukaluokēwā, a apo akula i kāna kāne a hoʻāla akula. | Then Laielohelohe did not stay her anger against Hinaikamalama, so she got between them, pushed Hinaikamalama away, took Kekalukaluokewa and embraced him, and wakened him. |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.6 sent.3 | I ia manawa, hoʻokaʻawale ʻia aʻela kona huhū mai ona aku, a pani ʻia ihola ka hilahila a me ka makaʻu ma ka hakahaka o ka huhū. | Then her rage left her and shame and fear took the place of rage. |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.7 sent.1 | I ka wā naʻe i ala aʻe ai ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā mai ka hiamoe ʻona ʻawa aʻe a ʻike maila i ka wahine, iā Lāʻielohelohe, honi ihola ma ke ʻano mau o ka hiki malihini ʻana. | When Kekalukaluokewa awoke from his drunken sleep and saw his wife Laielohelohe, they kissed as strangers meet. |
| Ch.33 p.178 para.7 sent.4 | Kamaʻilio aku paha auaneʻi wau, ʻo ka make mai kā ia ala, no laila, ma kahi a ka haku o kāua e manaʻo ai, pono nō ke hoʻokō aku. | if I should object, he would kill me; therefore, whatever our lord wishes it is best for us to obey; |
| Ch.33 p.179 para.1 sent.7 | A no koʻu makemake ʻole, ua hūnā wau iaʻu iho ma nā hale kuaʻāina, a no ia mea nō hoʻi, ua haʻalele wau i kahi aʻu i hoʻonoho ai, a ua ʻimi mai nei wau iā ʻoe. | and because I did not like it, I hid myself in the country people's houses, and for the same reason have I left the seat appointed me, and have sought you; |
| Ch.33 p.179 para.1 sent.11 | No laila, ma kēia pō, e hoʻokaʻawale ʻoe i kēlā wahine.” | therefore, leave this woman this very night." |
| Ch.33 p.179 para.1 sent.12 | A no kēia mea, ua pono ka ʻōlelo a ka wahine i mua o kāna kāne, akā, ma kēia ʻōlelo hope a Lāʻielohelohe, i ia manawa, ua hoʻā ʻia ke ahi ʻenaʻena o ke aloha wela o Hinaikamalama no Kekalukaluokēwā, no ka mea, e kaʻawale ana lāua mai ko lāua launa hewa ʻana. | Now his wife's words seemed right to her husband; but at Laielohelohe's last request to separate them from their sinful companionship, then was kindled the fire of Hinaikamalama's hot love for Kekalukaluokewa. |
| Ch.33 p.179 para.2 sent.1 | Hoʻi akula ʻo Hinaikamalama i Haneoʻo, a noho ihola ma kona hale mau. | Hinaikamalama returned home to Haneoo to live; |
| Ch.33 p.179 para.2 sent.2 | I kēlā lā kēia lā o Hinaikamalama ma kona hale aliʻi, he mea mau ia ka noho ma ka puka o ka hale, a huli ke alo i Kaʻuiki, no ka mea, ua hoʻopuni ʻia ʻo ia e ke aloha wela. | every day that Hinaikamalama stayed at her chief-house, she was wont to sit at the door of the house and turn her face to Kauwiki, for the hot love that wrapped her about. |
| Ch.33 p.179 para.3 sent.1 | I kekahi lā, i ke aliʻi wahine e hoʻonānā ana i kona aloha iā Kekalukaluokēwā, piʻi aʻela ʻo ia a me kona mau kahu i luna o Kaiwiopele a noho ihola ma laila. | One day, as the princess sought to ease the love she bore to Kekalukaluokewa, she climbed Kaiwiopele with her attendants, and sat there |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.3 sent.2 | Noho ihola lākou ma ia lā a ahiahi, hoʻi akula i ka hale, kēnā maila nā mākua a me nā kahu e ʻai, akā, ʻaʻole loaʻa iā ia ka ʻono o ka ʻai, no ka mea, ua pouli i ke aloha. | They sat there until evening, then they returned to the house; her parents and her attendants commanded her to eat, but she had no appetite for food because of her love. |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.4 sent.2 | A no laila, ua hoʻomanawanui ʻo ia i kekahi mau lā ma hope mai o ko lāua kaʻawale ʻana. | but he endured it for some days after their separation. |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.5 sent.1 | A ma kēlā lā, iā Hinaikamalama i piʻi ai i luna o Kaiwiopele, a ma ia pō iho, hiki ʻo ia i o Hinaikamalama lā me ka ʻike ʻole o Lāʻielohelohe, no ka mea, ua hiamoe ʻo ia. | And on the day when Hinaikamalama went up on Kaiwiopele, that same night, he went to Hinaikamalama without Laielohelohe's knowledge, for she was asleep. |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.6 sent.1 | Iā Kekalukaluokēwā i hiki aku ai, pololei akula nō ʻo ia a ma kahi a ke aliʻi wahine e hiamoe ana, lālau akula i ka wahine ma ke poʻo, a hoʻāla akula. | When Kekalukaluokewa came, he went right to the place where the princess slept, took the woman by the head and wakened her. |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.6 sent.3 | I ia manawa, kāhea aʻela ʻo ia i nā kahu e hoʻā ke kukui, a ma ka wanaʻao, hoʻi akula ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā me kāna hānau kama (Lāʻielohelohe). | Then she called out to the attendants to light the lamps, and at dawn Kekalukaluokewa returned to his true wife, Laielohelohe. |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.7 sent.1 | Ma ia manawa mai, he mea mau iā Kekalukaluokēwā ka hele pinepine i o Hinaikamalama i kēlā pō kēia pō me kona ʻike ʻole ʻia, a hala he anahulu ʻokoʻa o ko Kekalukaluokēwā hoʻomau ʻana e hana hewa me Hinaikamalama me ka ʻike ʻole o kāna wahine, no ka mea, ua uhi paʻapū ʻia ko Lāʻielohelohe ʻike e ka ʻona ʻawa mau ma muli o ka makemake o kāna kāne. | After that, Kekalukaluokewa went to Hinaikamalama every night without being seen; ten whole days passed that the two did evil together without the wife knowing it; for in order to carry out her husband's desire Laielohelohe's senses were darkened by the effects of awa. |
| Ch.33 p.180 para.8 sent.1 | Iā Kekalukaluokēwā me nā kānaka ma ka hale kahi olonā, i ia manawa i launa ai ka wahine kamaʻāina me Lāʻielohelohe, me ka ʻī aku ma kāna ʻōlelo hoʻohuahualau, “Pehea ko aliʻi kāne? | "While Kekalukaluokewa was in the fiber-combing house with the men, the woman visited with Laielohelohe, and she said mysteriously, ''How is your husband? |
| Ch.33 p.181 para.3 sent.2 | ʻO kā māua mahina ʻai, aia ma kapa alanui ponoʻī. | Our garden patch is right on the edge of the road; |
| Ch.33 p.181 para.3 sent.3 | I ka wanaʻao, ala akula kaʻu kāne i ka mahi ʻai ma ua mahina ʻai nei a māua. | my husband gets up to dig in our garden. |
| Ch.33 p.181 para.3 sent.7 | A ma ia pō mai, i ka puka a ka mahina, ala aʻela wau me kaʻu kāne, a iho akula i ka paeaea ʻāweoweo ma ke kai o Haneoʻo. | On the next night, at moonrise, I got up with my husband, and we went to fish for red fish in the sea at Haneoo; |
| Ch.33 p.181 para.3 sent.8 | Iā māua e hele ana, a hiki i ke ʻalu kahawai, nānā akula māua, e hōʻea mai ana kēia mea ma luna o ke ʻāhua i hala hope iā māua. | as we came to the edge of the gulch, we saw some one appear above the rise we had just left; |
| Ch.33 p.181 para.3 sent.9 | I ia manawa, alu aʻela māua e peʻe ana, aia naʻe, ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā kēia e hele nei, a laila, ukali akula māua ma ko ia ala mau kapuaʻi a hiki māua ma kahi i kokoke i ka hale o Hinaikamalama. | then we turned aside and hid; it was Kekalukaluokewa coming; then we followed his footsteps until we came close to Hinaikamalama's house; |
| Ch.33 p.181 para.3 sent.11 | Iā māua i ka lawaiʻa a hoʻi mai māua a ma kahi nō a mākou i hālāwai mua ai, loaʻa ihola māua iā Kekalukaluokēwā e hele ana. | After we had fished and returned to the place where we met him first, we met him going back, |
| Ch.34 p.183 para.1 sent.4 | Iaʻu paha e moe ana i ka ʻona ʻawa, hele kēlā, akā, ma kēia pō, e ukali ana wau iā ia.” | so that when I am asleep under the influence of the awa, he can go; but to-night I will follow him." |
| Ch.34 p.183 para.2 sent.1 | I ia pō iho, hoʻomaka hou ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā e hāʻawi i ka ʻawa, a laila, hoʻokō akula nō kāna wahine, akā, ma hope o ka pau ʻana o ka inu ʻawa ʻana, puka koke akula ʻo Lāʻielohelohe i waho o ka hale, a hoʻolualuaʻi akula a pau loa ka ʻawa i ka luaʻi ʻia. | That night Kekalukaluokewa again gave her the awa, then she obeyed him, but after she had drunk it all, she went outside the house immediately and threw it up; |
| Ch.34 p.183 para.2 sent.2 | ʻAʻole naʻe i ʻike mai kāna kāne i kēia hana maʻalea a kāna wahine, a i ka hoʻi ʻana aku i ka hale, hāʻawi mua ihola ua ʻo Lāʻielohelohe iā ia i ka hiamoe nui ma kona ʻano maʻalea. | and afterwards her husband did not know of his wife's guile, and she returned to the house, and Laielohelohe lay down and pretended to sleep. |
| Ch.34 p.183 para.4 sent.2 | I ia manawa, ʻōlelo aku ʻo Lāʻielohelohe iā Kekalukaluokēwā, ʻoiai, aia ma ko Hinaikamalama wahi moe lāua, “E kuʻu kāne, ua puni wau iā ʻoe. | Then Laielohelohe said to Kekalukaluokewa, when she came to Hinaikamalama's house where they were sleeping, "My husband, you have deceived me; |
| Ch.34 p.183 para.4 sent.4 | A no laila, ua loaʻa maopopo aʻe nei ʻolua iaʻu, no laila, ke ʻōlelo nei wau iā ʻoe, ʻaʻole e pono iā kāua ke hoʻomanawanui i ka noho ʻana ma ʻaneʻi. | now I have found you two, I tell you it is not right to endure this any longer. |
| Ch.34 p.185 para.1 sent.2 | A ma ia ao ʻana aʻe, hoʻomākaukau koke nā waʻa no ka hoʻokō i ka ʻōlelo a Lāʻielohelohe, me ka manaʻo, i ia pō iho e holo ai. | and next day the canoes were hastily prepared to fulfill Laielohelohe's demand, thinking to sail that night; |
| Ch.34 p.185 para.1 sent.3 | ʻAʻole naʻe i holo, no ka mea, ua hōʻōmaʻimaʻi aʻela ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā, a no laila, ua hala i ia pō, a i kekahi pō iho, hana hou nō ʻo Kekalukaluokēwā i kāna hana, a no ia mea, ua haʻalele ʻo Lāʻielohelohe i kona aloha i kāna kāne, a hoʻi akula i Kauaʻi ma kona mau waʻa me kona manaʻo hou ʻole aku iā Kekalukaluokēwā. | but they did not, for Kekalukaluokewa pretended to be ill, and they postponed going that night. The next day he did the same thing again, so Laielohelohe gave up her love for her husband and returned to Kauai with her canoe, without thinking again of Kekalukaluokewa. |
| Ch.34 p.185 para.2 sent.1 | Iā Lāʻielohelohe ma Kauaʻi ma hope iho o kona haʻalele ʻana i kāna kāne, i kekahi lā, hiki hou mai ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā mai Kahakaekaea mai, a hālāwai ihola me Lāʻielohelohe, a hala ʻehā malama o ko lāua hui kalohe ʻana. | The next day after Laielohelohe reached Kauai after leaving her husband, Kaonohiokala arrived again from Kahakaekaea, and met with Laielohelohe. Four months passed of their amorous meetings; |
| Ch.34 p.185 para.3 sent.2 | A ma hope o ia manawa haʻohaʻo o Lāʻieikawai, hoʻi akula ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā i luna. | and as Laieikawai wondered at the long absence, Kaonohiokala returned. |
| Ch.34 p.185 para.4 sent.1 | ʻĪ maila ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā, “Ua hewa ko Lāʻielohelohe ma ka noho ʻana me kāna kāne. | Said Kaonohiokala. "Laielohelohe has had trouble with her husband; |
| Ch.34 p.185 para.7 sent.5 | No laila, e hāʻawi mai ʻoe i ʻike noʻu, i ʻike hiki ke ʻike aku ma kahi mamao i ʻike au i ka pono o koʻu hoahānau.” | so give me power to see to that distant place to know how it is with my relatives." |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.1 sent.1 | A no kēia mea, ʻōlelo mai ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele, kona makuahōnōwai kāne, “E hoʻi ʻoe a ma ko ʻolua wahi. | Then said Moanalihaikawaokele, her father-in-law, "Go home |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.1 sent.3 | Inā ua hiamoe, a laila, e hele aku ʻoe a komo i loko o ka heiau kapu, inā e ʻike aku ʻoe i ka ipu, ua ulana ʻia i ke ʻie, a ua haku ʻia ka hulu ma ka lihilihi o ke poʻi, ʻo ia ua ipu lā. | if she is asleep. then go into the taboo temple; if you see a gourd plaited with straw and feathers mounted on the edge of the cover, that is the gourd. |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.1 sent.4 | ʻO nā manu nui e kū ana ma nā ʻaoʻao o ua ipu lā, mai makaʻu ʻoe. | Do not be afraid of the great birds that stand on either side of the gourd, |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.2 sent.1 | “A i kou hiki ʻana i kahi o ua ipu lā e kū ana, wehe aʻe ʻoe i ke poʻi, a laila, hoʻokomo iho ʻoe i ko poʻo i ka waha o ua ipu lā, a laila, kāhea iho ʻoe ma ka inoa o ua ipu lā,'E Laukapalili ē, hō mai i ka ʻike' | And when you come to where the gourd is standing take off the cover, then put your head into the mouth of the gourd and call out the name of the gourd, 'Laukapalili, Trembling Leaf, give me wisdom.' |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.2 sent.4 | He mea mau naʻe iā Laukieleʻula, ma ka pō ʻo ia e ala ai e mālama i ua ipu lā o ka ʻike, a ma ke ao, he hiamoe. | Laukieleula was wont to watch the gourd of wisdom at night, and by day she slept. |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.3 sent.1 | I kekahi kakahiaka, i ka wā e hoʻomaka mai ai ka mehana o ka lā ma luna o ka ʻāina, hele akula ʻo ia e mākaʻi iā Laukieleʻula, aia naʻe e hiamoe ana. | Very early next morning, at the time when the sun's warmth began to spread over the earth, she went to spy out Laukieleula; she was just asleep. |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.4 sent.1 | A hiki kēia ma kahi o ka ipu, ka mea i kapa ʻia, “Kaipuokaʻike,” wehe aʻela kēia i ke poʻi o ka ipu, a kūpou ihola kona poʻo ma ka waha o ua ipu nei, a kāhea ihola ma ka inoa o ua ipu nei. | When she came to the gourd, the one called "the gourd of wisdom," she lifted the cover from the gourd and bent her head to the mouth of the gourd, and she called the name of the gourd, |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.4 sent.2 | I ia wā ka hoʻomaka ʻana e ʻike i nā mea a pau i hana ʻia ma kahi mamao. | then she began to see all that was happening at a distance. |
| Ch.34 p.187 para.6 sent.3 | ʻAʻole naʻe i liʻuliʻu ma hope iho o ko Kaʻōnohiokalā haʻohaʻo ʻana. | not for long was Kaonohiokala left to wonder. |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.1 sent.3 | A i ka pau ʻana aʻe o ka pouli ma ka lewa, aia hoʻi, e kau mai ana ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele me Laukieleʻula, a me Lāʻieikawai i luna o ke alanui ānuenue. | And when the darkness was over, lo! Moanalihaikawaokele and Laukieleula and Laieikawai sat above the rainbow pathway. |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.2 sent.1 | A ʻōlelo maila ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele i mua o Kaʻōnohiokalā, “Ua hewa kāu hana, e Kaʻōnohiokalā ē, no ka mea, ua haumia loa ʻoe, a no laila, ʻaʻole e loaʻa hou iā ʻoe he wahi noho i loko o Kahakaekaea, a ʻo kou uku hoʻopaʻi, e lilo ana ʻoe i mea e hoʻomākaʻukaʻu ʻia ai ma nā alanui, a ma ka puka o nā hale, a ʻo kou inoa, he lapu, a ʻo kāu mea e ʻai ai, ʻo nā pulelehua, a ma laila kou kuleana a mau i kāu pua.” | And Moanalihaikawaokele said to Kaonohiokala, "You have sinned, O Kaonohiokala, for you have defiled yourself and, therefore, you shall no longer have a place to dwell within Kahakaekaea, and the penalty you shall pay, to become a fearsome thing on the highway and at the doors of houses, and your name is Lapu, Vanity, and for your food you shall eat moths; and thus shall you live and your posterity." |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.3 sent.1 | (Ua ʻōlelo ʻia ma kēia kaʻao, ʻo Kaʻōnohiokalā ka lapu mua ma kēia mau moku, a ma ona lā nā lapu e ʻauana nei i kēia mau lā, ma ka hoʻohālike ʻana i ke ʻano o ka lapu, he ʻuhane ʻino.) | (In this story it is told how Kaonohiokala was the first ghost on these islands, and from his day to this, the ghosts wander from place to place, and they resemble evil spirits in their nature.) |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.4 sent.1 | Iā lākou i hoʻi ai i luna, ma hope iho o ka pau ʻana o ko Kaʻōnohiokalā ola, hālāwai akula lākou me Kahalaomāpuana i loko o Keʻalohilani. | On the way back after Kaonohiokala's punishment, they encountered Kahalaomapuana in Kealohilani, |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.4 sent.2 | ʻAkahi nō a lohe lākou aia ʻo ia ma laila. | and for the first time discovered she was there. |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.4 sent.3 | A ma kēia hālāwai ʻana o lākou, haʻi akula ʻo Kahalaomāpuana i ka moʻolelo o kona hoʻihoʻi ʻia ʻana e like me kā kākou ʻike ʻana ma ka mokuna iwakāluakumamāhiku o kēia kaʻao. | And at this discovery, Kahalaomapuana told the story of her dismissal, as we saw in Chapter XXVII of this story, |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.4 sent.4 | A pau kēia mau mea, lawe ʻia akula ʻo Kahalaomāpuana e pani ma ka hakahaka o Kaʻōnohiokalā. | and at the end Kahalaomapuana was taken to fill Kaonohiokala's place. |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.5 sent.1 | Iā lākou ma Kahakaekaea, i kekahi manawa, nui maila ke aloha o Lāʻieikawai iā Lāʻielohelohe, akā, ʻaʻole e hiki ma kona manaʻo. | At Kahakaekaea, sometimes Laieikawai longed for Laielohelohe, but she could do nothing; |
| Ch.34 p.189 para.6 sent.1 | ʻĪ mai naʻe ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele, “ʻAʻole e ʻae ʻia kou kaikaina e noho pū me kākou, no ka mea, ua haumia ʻo ia iā Kaʻōnohiokalā, akā, inā he manaʻo kou i ko kaikaina, a laila, e hoʻi ʻoe, a e pani ma ka hakahaka o Kekalukaluokēwā.” | Said Moanalihaikawaokele, "Your sister can not live here with us, for she is defiled with Kaonohiokala; but if you want your sister, then you go and fill Kekalukaluokewa's place." |
| Ch.34 p.191 para.1 sent.1 | A ma ka lā o Lāʻieikawai i hoʻokuʻu ʻia mai ai, ʻōlelo maila ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele, “E hoʻi ʻoe a me kou kaikaina. | And on the day when Laieikawai was let down, Moanalihaikawaokele said, "Return to your sister |
| Ch.34 p.191 para.1 sent.2 | E noho malū ʻoe a hiki i kou manawa e make ai, a ma kēia lā aku, ʻaʻole e kapa ʻia kou inoa ʻo Lāʻieikawai, akā, ʻo kou inoa mau ʻo KAWAHINEOKALIʻULĀ, a ma ia inoa ou e kūkulu aku ai kou hanauna iā ʻoe, a ʻo ʻoe nō ke akua o kou mau hanauna.” | and live virgin until your death, and from this time forth your name shall be no longer called Laieikawai, but your name shall be 'The Woman of the Twilight,' and by this name shall all your kin bow down to you and you shall be like a god to them." |
| Ch.34 p.191 para.2 sent.1 | I ia manawa, haʻi akula ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele i nā mea a pau e like me ka mea i ʻōlelo ʻia ma luna, a pau ia, hoʻi akula ʻo Moanalihaikawaokele i luna, a noho ma ka peʻa kapu o Kūkulu o Tahiti. | Then. Moanalihaikawaokele said all these things told above, and when he had ended he returned to the heavens and dwelt in the taboo house on the borders of Tahiti. |
| Ch.34 p.191 para.3 sent.1 | I ia manawa, hoʻoili akula ʻo Kawahineokaliʻulā i ke aupuni i ka makāula, ʻo Lāʻieikawai hoʻi ka mea i kapa ʻia ʻo Kawahineokaliʻulā, ua noho ʻo ia ma kona ʻano akua, a ma ona lā i kūkulu aku ai ka makāula, a me kona hanauna e like me ka ʻōlelo a Moanalihaikawaokele iā ia. | Then, The Woman of the Twilight placed the government upon the seer; so did Laieikawai, the one called The Woman of the Twilight, and she lived as a god, and to her the seer bowed down and her kindred, according to Moanalihaikawaokele's word to her. |
| Ch.34 p.191 para.4 sent.1 | A ma ia ʻano nō ʻo Lāʻieikawai i noho ai a hiki i kona make ʻana. | And so Laieikawai lived until her death. |
| Ch.34 p.191 para.4 sent.2 | A mai ia manawa mai a hiki i kēia mau lā, ke hoʻomana ʻia nei nō e kekahi poʻe ma ka inoa ʻo Kawahineokaliʻulā (Lāʻieikawai). | And from that time to this she is still worshiped as The Woman of the Twilight. |